corelow.c does not need sys/file.h
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
82704155 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
b8891f8d 24@set CSKY
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15 36@set Renesas
b4cbbe8f 37@set S/390
49fa1e15
AM
38@set SPU
39@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 40@set WIN32
e0001a05 41@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
42@end ifset
43@c man end
44
9160ea82
AM
45@ifnottex
46@dircategory Software development
47@direntry
252b5132 48* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
49@end direntry
50@end ifnottex
252b5132 51
0e9517a9 52@copying
e49e529d
JM
53This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56@end ifset
57version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 58
82704155 59Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 60
cf055d54 61Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 62under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
63or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 66section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 67@end copying
252b5132
RH
68@iftex
69@finalout
70@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 71@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 72@titlepage
71ba23f6 73@title The GNU linker
252b5132 74@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
75@subtitle @code{ld}
76@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78@end ifset
252b5132
RH
79@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80@author Steve Chamberlain
81@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
82@page
83
84@tex
85{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
86\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 88\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
89\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90}
91\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92@end tex
93
94@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 95@c man begin COPYRIGHT
82704155 96Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132 137@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
138@ifset ARM
139* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
140@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
141@ifset M68HC11
142* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
143@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
147@ifset M68K
148* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
149@end ifset
833794fc
MR
150@ifset MIPS
151* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
159@ifset S/390
160* S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
161@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
162@ifset SPU
163* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
164@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
165@ifset TICOFF
166* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
167@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
168@ifset WIN32
169* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
170@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
171@ifset XTENSA
172* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
173@end ifset
252b5132
RH
174@end ifclear
175@ifclear SingleFormat
176* BFD:: BFD
177@end ifclear
178@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
179
180* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
181* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 182* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 183* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 184@end menu
84ec0e6d 185@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
186
187@node Overview
188@chapter Overview
189
190@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
191@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 192
0879a67a 193@ifset man
0285c67d 194@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 195ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
196@c man end
197
198@c man begin SEEALSO
199ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
200the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
201@file{ld}.
202@c man end
203@end ifset
204
205@c man begin DESCRIPTION
206
ff5dcc92 207@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 208their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 209compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 210
ff5dcc92 211@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
212a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
213to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
214
0285c67d
NC
215@ifset man
216@c For the man only
ece2d90e 217This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
218@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
219language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
220@end ifset
221
252b5132 222@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
223This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
224to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
225write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
226@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
227available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
228@end ifclear
229
230Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
231linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
232execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 233@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
234(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
235
0285c67d
NC
236@c man end
237
252b5132
RH
238@node Invocation
239@chapter Invocation
240
0285c67d
NC
241@c man begin DESCRIPTION
242
ff5dcc92 243The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
244and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
245you have many choices to control its behavior.
246
0285c67d
NC
247@c man end
248
252b5132
RH
249@ifset UsesEnvVars
250@menu
a05a5b64 251* Options:: Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
252* Environment:: Environment Variables
253@end menu
254
255@node Options
a05a5b64 256@section Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
257@end ifset
258
259@cindex command line
260@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
261
262@c man begin OPTIONS
263
252b5132
RH
264The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
265practice few of them are used in any particular context.
266@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 267For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
268object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
269link a file @code{hello.o}:
270
271@smallexample
272ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
273@end smallexample
274
ff5dcc92 275This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
276result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
277the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
278directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
279
ff5dcc92 280Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
281point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
282as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
283which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
284files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
285different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
286occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
287option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
288noted in the descriptions below.
289
290@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
291Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
292together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
293options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
294an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
295
296Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
297specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
298and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
299are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
300message @samp{No input files}.
301
36f63dca 302If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
303assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
304augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
305linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
306permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
307or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
308@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
309script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
310extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
311to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
312the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
313
314For options whose names are a single letter,
315option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
316whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
317option that requires them.
318
319For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 320precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 321@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 322this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 323only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
324@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
325name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
326output.
327
328Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
329option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
330immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
331@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
332Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
333accepted.
252b5132 334
36f63dca 335Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
a05a5b64 336(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
337prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
338compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
339
340@smallexample
2509a395 341 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
342@end smallexample
343
344This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
345silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
346may also arise when passing options that require values through a
347driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
348a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
349and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
350the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
351
352@smallexample
353 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
354@end smallexample
4e53152f 355
a05a5b64 356Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
4e53152f
NC
357linker:
358
ff5dcc92 359@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 360@include at-file.texi
dff70155 361
2509a395
SL
362@kindex -a @var{keyword}
363@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
364This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
365argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
366@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
367@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
368to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
369
7ee314fa
AM
370@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
373@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
374specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
375will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
376finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 377it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 378This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 379interface.
7ee314fa 380
252b5132
RH
381@ifclear SingleFormat
382@cindex binary input format
383@kindex -b @var{format}
384@kindex --format=@var{format}
385@cindex input format
386@cindex input format
387@item -b @var{input-format}
388@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
389@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
390file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 391@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 392that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 393configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 394to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
395default input format the most usual format on each machine.
396@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
397supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
398formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
399@xref{BFD}.
400
401You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
402binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
403linking object files of different formats), by including
404@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 405particular format.
252b5132
RH
406
407The default format is taken from the environment variable
408@code{GNUTARGET}.
409@ifset UsesEnvVars
410@xref{Environment}.
411@end ifset
412You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
413@code{TARGET};
414@ifclear man
415see @ref{Format Commands}.
416@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
417@end ifclear
418
419@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
420@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
421@cindex compatibility, MRI
422@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
423@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 424For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 425files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
426@ifclear man
427@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
428@end ifclear
429@ifset man
430the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
431@end ifset
432Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 433the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
434scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
435If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
436specified by any @samp{-L} options.
437
438@cindex common allocation
439@kindex -d
440@kindex -dc
441@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 442@item -d
252b5132
RH
443@itemx -dc
444@itemx -dp
445These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
446compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
447even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
448script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
449@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
450
7ee314fa
AM
451@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
452@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
453@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
454@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
455Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
456@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
457specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
458will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
459option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 460The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 461
252b5132
RH
462@cindex entry point, from command line
463@kindex -e @var{entry}
464@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 465@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
466@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
467Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
468program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
469named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
470and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
471base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
472@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
473and other ways of specifying the entry point.
474
b58f81ae
DJ
475@kindex --exclude-libs
476@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
477Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 478exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
479@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
480automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
481port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
482explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
483option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
484be treated as hidden.
485
e1c37eb5
DK
486@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
487@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
488Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
489should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
490into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
491may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
492used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
493the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
494match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
495command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
496of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
497regardless of this option.
498
252b5132
RH
499@cindex dynamic symbol table
500@kindex -E
501@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 502@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
503@item -E
504@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
505@itemx --no-export-dynamic
506When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
507option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
508all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
509set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
510
511If you do not use either of these options (or use the
512@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
513dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
514referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
515
516If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
517back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
518dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
519linking the program itself.
520
55255dae 521You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 522be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 523See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 524
8b747e1a
DK
525Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
526support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
527the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
528
36f63dca 529@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
530@cindex big-endian objects
531@cindex endianness
532@kindex -EB
533@item -EB
534Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
535
536@cindex little-endian objects
537@kindex -EL
538@item -EL
539Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 540@end ifclear
252b5132 541
2509a395
SL
542@kindex -f @var{name}
543@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
544@item -f @var{name}
545@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
546When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
547to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
548table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
549symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
550
551If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
552run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
553the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
554first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
555@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
556in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
557Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
558implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
559machine specific performance.
560
561This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
562will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
563
2509a395
SL
564@kindex -F @var{name}
565@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 566@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 567@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
568When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
569the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
570of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
571on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
572
573If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
574run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
575dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
576filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
577found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
578used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
579@var{name}.
580
ff5dcc92 581Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 582toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
583object files.
584@ifclear SingleFormat
585The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 586@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 587@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
588environment variable.
589@end ifclear
590The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
591creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 592
3dbf70a2 593@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
594@kindex -fini=@var{name}
595@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
596When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
597executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
598address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
599the function to call.
600
252b5132
RH
601@kindex -g
602@item -g
603Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
604
2509a395
SL
605@kindex -G @var{value}
606@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 607@cindex object size
2509a395 608@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
609@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
610Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
611@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 612MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
613sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
614
615@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 616@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 617@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 618@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
619@itemx -soname=@var{name}
620When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
621the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
622which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
623linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
624field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
625
626@kindex -i
627@cindex incremental link
628@item -i
629Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
630
3dbf70a2 631@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
632@kindex -init=@var{name}
633@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
634When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
635executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
636of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
637function to call.
638
252b5132 639@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 640@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 641@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 642@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
643@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
644Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
645list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
646If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 647will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 648will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 649
ff5dcc92 650On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
651files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
652and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
653called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
654@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
655indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
656to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
657@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
658
659The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
660specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
661was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
662command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
663archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
664the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
665
ff5dcc92 666See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
667archives multiple times.
668
669You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
670
671@ifset GENERIC
672This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 673if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
674behaviour of the AIX linker.
675@end ifset
676
677@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 678@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 679@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 680@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 681@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
682Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
683for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
684option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
685in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
686on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 687@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
688order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
689how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
690option is specified.
252b5132 691
3aa2d05a
NC
692If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
693prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
694@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 695
252b5132
RH
696@ifset UsesEnvVars
697The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 698@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
699some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
700@end ifset
701
702The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
703@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
704at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
705
706@cindex emulation
707@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 708@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
709Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
710emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
711
712If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
713@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
714
715Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
716configured.
717
718@cindex link map
719@kindex -M
720@kindex --print-map
721@item -M
722@itemx --print-map
723Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
724information about the link, including the following:
725
726@itemize @bullet
727@item
3b83e13a 728Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
729@item
730How common symbols are allocated.
731@item
732All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
733which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
734@item
735The values assigned to symbols.
736
737Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
738involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
739have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
740linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
741of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
742the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
743linker script containing:
744
745@smallexample
746 foo = 1
747 foo = foo * 4
748 foo = foo + 8
749@end smallexample
750
751will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
752option is used:
753
754@smallexample
755 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
756 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
757 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
758@end smallexample
759
760See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
761scripts.
d2ef37eb
L
762
763@item How GNU properties are merged.
764
765When linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into one output
766.note.gnu.property section, some properties are removed or updated,
767which are reported in the link map as
768
769@smallexample
770Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
771@end smallexample
772
773It indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output when
774merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose property 0xc0000002 value
775is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, which doesn't have property 0xc0000002.
776
777@smallexample
778Updated property 0xc0000002 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
779@end smallexample
780
781It indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to 0x1 in output
782when merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value
783is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
252b5132
RH
784@end itemize
785
786@kindex -n
787@cindex read-only text
788@cindex NMAGIC
789@kindex --nmagic
790@item -n
791@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
792Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
793libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
794mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
795
796@kindex -N
797@kindex --omagic
798@cindex read/write from cmd line
799@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 800@item -N
252b5132
RH
801@itemx --omagic
802Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
803not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
804libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
805mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
806is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
807specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
808
809@kindex --no-omagic
810@cindex OMAGIC
811@item --no-omagic
812This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
813sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
814be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
815shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
816
817@kindex -o @var{output}
818@kindex --output=@var{output}
819@cindex naming the output file
820@item -o @var{output}
821@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 822Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
823option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
824script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
825
826@kindex -O @var{level}
827@cindex generating optimized output
828@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 829If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 830the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
831should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
832option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
833the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
834no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
835of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 836
387dd777
DP
837@kindex -plugin @var{name}
838@item -plugin @var{name}
839Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
840the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
841automatically added by the complier, when using link time
842optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
843wish.
844
845Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
846from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
847@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
848those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
849copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
850based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
6c19b93b 851just copy in the newest one.
387dd777 852
26278bb8
UD
853@kindex --push-state
854@cindex push state governing input file handling
855@item --push-state
856The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
857flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
858restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
859
860The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
861@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
862@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
863@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
864@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
865@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
866
867One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
868used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
869listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
870something as follows:
871
872@smallexample
873-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
874@end smallexample
875
876@kindex --pop-state
877@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 878@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
879Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
880flags governing input file handling.
881
a712da20
NC
882@kindex -q
883@kindex --emit-relocs
884@cindex retain relocations in final executable
885@item -q
886@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 887Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
888Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
889order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
890in larger executables.
891
dbab7a7b
NC
892This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
893
4f471f39
RS
894@kindex --force-dynamic
895@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
896@item --force-dynamic
897Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
898to VxWorks targets.
899
252b5132
RH
900@cindex partial link
901@cindex relocatable output
902@kindex -r
1049f94e 903@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 904@item -r
1049f94e 905@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 906Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 907turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
908linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
909magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
910@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 911@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
912If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
913linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
914constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
915
62bf86b4
HPN
916When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
917partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
918relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
919example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
920with input files in other formats at all.
921
252b5132
RH
922This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
923
924@kindex -R @var{file}
925@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
926@cindex symbol-only input
927@item -R @var{filename}
928@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
929Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
930relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
931to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
932programs. You may use this option more than once.
933
ff5dcc92 934For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 935followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 936the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
937
938@kindex -s
939@kindex --strip-all
940@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 941@item -s
252b5132
RH
942@itemx --strip-all
943Omit all symbol information from the output file.
944
945@kindex -S
946@kindex --strip-debug
947@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 948@item -S
252b5132
RH
949@itemx --strip-debug
950Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
951
a70f34c0
NC
952@kindex --strip-discarded
953@kindex --no-strip-discarded
954@item --strip-discarded
955@itemx --no-strip-discarded
956Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
957Enabled by default.
958
252b5132
RH
959@kindex -t
960@kindex --trace
961@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 962@item -t
252b5132 963@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 964Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
965
966@kindex -T @var{script}
967@kindex --script=@var{script}
968@cindex script files
969@item -T @var{scriptfile}
970@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
971Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 972@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 973@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
974output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
975the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
976specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
977options accumulate.
252b5132 978
14be8564
L
979@kindex -dT @var{script}
980@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
981@cindex script files
982@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
983@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
984Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
985
986This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
987processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
988command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
989@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
990behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
991command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
992the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
993@samp{gcc}).
994
252b5132
RH
995@kindex -u @var{symbol}
996@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
997@cindex undefined symbol
998@item -u @var{symbol}
999@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
1000Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
1001symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1002modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1003different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1004option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1005
0a618243
AB
1006If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1007into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1008undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1009instead.
1010
1011@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1012@cindex symbols, require defined
1013@cindex defined symbol
1014@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1015Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1016is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1017is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1018and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1019@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1020can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1021
252b5132
RH
1022@kindex -Ur
1023@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1024@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1025For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1026@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1027turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1028@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1029It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1030with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1031be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1032@samp{-r} for the others.
1033
c005eb9e
AB
1034@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1035@cindex orphan sections
1036@cindex sections, orphan
1037@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1038Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1039specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1040
1041@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1042
1043@table @code
1044@item place
1045Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1046the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
d2732b69 1047@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
c005eb9e
AB
1048
1049@item discard
1050All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1051@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1052
1053@item warn
1054The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1055issue a warning.
1056
1057@item error
1058The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1059@end table
1060
1061The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1062
577a0623
AM
1063@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1064@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1065Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1066@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1067missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1068specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1069multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1070input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1071in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1072
252b5132
RH
1073@kindex -v
1074@kindex -V
1075@kindex --version
1076@cindex version
1077@item -v
1078@itemx --version
1079@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1080Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1081lists the supported emulations.
1082
1083@kindex -x
1084@kindex --discard-all
1085@cindex deleting local symbols
1086@item -x
1087@itemx --discard-all
1088Delete all local symbols.
1089
1090@kindex -X
1091@kindex --discard-locals
1092@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1093@item -X
252b5132 1094@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1095Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1096system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1097or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1098
1099@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1100@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1101@cindex symbol tracing
1102@item -y @var{symbol}
1103@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1104Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1105option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1106to prepend an underscore.
1107
1108This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1109don't know where the reference is coming from.
1110
1111@kindex -Y @var{path}
1112@item -Y @var{path}
1113Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1114for Solaris compatibility.
1115
1116@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1117@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1118The recognized keywords are:
1119@table @samp
1120
e6e2dfbd
AM
1121@item bndplt
1122Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1123
1124@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1125@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1126@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1127@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1128Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1129to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1130@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1131@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1132@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1133@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1134Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1135
cd6d6c15 1136@item combreloc
e6e2dfbd
AM
1137@itemx nocombreloc
1138Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1139dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
cd6d6c15 1140
b8871f35 1141@item common
e6e2dfbd
AM
1142@itemx nocommon
1143Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1144link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1145
1146@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1147Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1148layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1149using pages of this size.
b8871f35 1150
cd6d6c15 1151@item defs
97a232d7
NC
1152Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1153is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1154This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
cd6d6c15 1155
e6e2dfbd
AM
1156@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1157@itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1158Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1159if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1160by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1161@samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1162may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1163selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1164these options.
1165
6aa29e7b
JJ
1166@item execstack
1167Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1168
b039ef04
L
1169@item global
1170This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1171the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1172of subsequently loaded libraries.
1173
93ab9c0d
NC
1174@item globalaudit
1175This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1176This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1177setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1178tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
a05a5b64 1179the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
6c19b93b 1180all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
93ab9c0d 1181
e6e2dfbd
AM
1182@item ibtplt
1183Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1184Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1185
8df93cb5 1186@item ibt
e6e2dfbd
AM
1187Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1188to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1189Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1190
cd6d6c15
NC
1191@item initfirst
1192This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1193It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1194before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1195the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1196the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1197objects.
1198
1199@item interpose
e6e2dfbd
AM
1200Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1201so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1202libraries not so marked.
cd6d6c15 1203
5fa222e4
AM
1204@item lazy
1205When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1206dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1207the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1208Lazy binding is the default.
1209
cd6d6c15 1210@item loadfltr
e6e2dfbd 1211Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
cd6d6c15 1212
e6e2dfbd
AM
1213@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1214Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
cd6d6c15 1215
e6e2dfbd
AM
1216@item muldefs
1217Allow multiple definitions.
b8871f35 1218
cd6d6c15 1219@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1220Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1221defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1222
1223@item nodefaultlib
e6e2dfbd
AM
1224Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1225should ignore any default library search paths.
cd6d6c15
NC
1226
1227@item nodelete
e6e2dfbd 1228Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
cd6d6c15
NC
1229
1230@item nodlopen
e6e2dfbd 1231Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
cd6d6c15
NC
1232
1233@item nodump
e6e2dfbd 1234Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
cd6d6c15 1235
6aa29e7b
JJ
1236@item noexecstack
1237Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1238
e6e2dfbd
AM
1239@item noextern-protected-data
1240Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1241library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1242used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1243generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1244module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1245i386 and x86-64.
8dfef1bd 1246
e6e2dfbd
AM
1247@item noreloc-overflow
1248Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1249relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1250overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
6aa29e7b 1251
cd6d6c15
NC
1252@item now
1253When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1254dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
e6e2dfbd
AM
1255when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1256function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1257called.
cd6d6c15
NC
1258
1259@item origin
e6e2dfbd 1260Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
cd6d6c15 1261
6aa29e7b 1262@item relro
e6e2dfbd 1263@itemx norelro
def5c83c
AM
1264Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1265specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1266relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1267than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
e6e2dfbd 1268Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
6aa29e7b 1269
47acac12
L
1270@item separate-code
1271@itemx noseparate-code
1272Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1273specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1274be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1275code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1276
e6e2dfbd
AM
1277@item shstk
1278Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1279to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1280Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
24718e3b 1281
04c3a755 1282@item stack-size=@var{value}
e6e2dfbd 1283Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
04c3a755
NS
1284Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1285@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1286
e6e2dfbd
AM
1287@item text
1288@itemx notext
1289@itemx textoff
1290Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1291relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1292@samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
48580982 1293
97a232d7
NC
1294@item undefs
1295Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1296either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1297This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1298
cd6d6c15
NC
1299@end table
1300
ece2d90e 1301Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1302
1303@kindex -(
1304@cindex groups of archives
1305@item -( @var{archives} -)
1306@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1307The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1308either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1309
1310The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1311references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1312the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1313archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1314object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1315would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1316they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1317resolved.
1318
1319Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1320it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1321more archives.
1322
69da35b5
NC
1323@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1324@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1325@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1326@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1327Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1328recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1329and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1330the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1331behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1332so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1333restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1334
4a43e768
AM
1335@kindex --as-needed
1336@kindex --no-as-needed
1337@item --as-needed
1338@itemx --no-as-needed
1339This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1340on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1341the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1342on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1343needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1344emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1345non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1346the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1347non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1348Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1349the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1350needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1351from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1352
e56f61be
L
1353@kindex --add-needed
1354@kindex --no-add-needed
1355@item --add-needed
1356@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1357These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1358their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1359options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1360and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1361
252b5132
RH
1362@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1363@item -assert @var{keyword}
1364This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1365
1366@kindex -Bdynamic
1367@kindex -dy
1368@kindex -call_shared
1369@item -Bdynamic
1370@itemx -dy
1371@itemx -call_shared
1372Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1373for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1374default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1375for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1376multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1377@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1378
a1ab1d2a
UD
1379@kindex -Bgroup
1380@item -Bgroup
1381Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1382section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1383object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1384@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1385only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1386
252b5132
RH
1387@kindex -Bstatic
1388@kindex -dn
1389@kindex -non_shared
1390@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1391@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1392@itemx -dn
1393@itemx -non_shared
1394@itemx -static
1395Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1396platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1397variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1398may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1399library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1400option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1401option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1402shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1403references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1404libraries.
252b5132
RH
1405
1406@kindex -Bsymbolic
1407@item -Bsymbolic
1408When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1409definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1410for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1411within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1412@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1413executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1414the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1415support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1416
40b36307
L
1417@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1418@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1419When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1420symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1421This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1422when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1423to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1424This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1425libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1426
55255dae
L
1427@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1428@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1429Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1430typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1431global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1432within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1433to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1434in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1435which support shared libraries.
1436
1437The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1438scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1439
40b36307
L
1440@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1441@item --dynamic-list-data
1442Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1443
1444@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1445@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1446Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1447is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1448
0b8a70d9
L
1449@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1450@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1451Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1452
252b5132
RH
1453@kindex --check-sections
1454@kindex --no-check-sections
1455@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1456@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1457Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1458been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1459perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1460suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1461allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
a05a5b64 1462restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1463Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1464force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1465option.
252b5132 1466
ddbb8a31
NC
1467@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1468@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1469@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1470@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1471This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1472by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1473command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1474output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1475input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1476specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1477follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1478behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1479
1480This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1481libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1482mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1483their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1484required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1485the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1486dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1487symbols.
1488
252b5132
RH
1489@cindex cross reference table
1490@kindex --cref
1491@item --cref
1492Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1493generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1494Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1495
1496The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1497easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1498sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1499symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1500definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1501where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1502symbol are listed.
252b5132 1503
4818e05f
AM
1504@cindex common allocation
1505@kindex --no-define-common
1506@item --no-define-common
1507This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1508The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1509@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1510
1511The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1512the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1513of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1514forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1515Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1516from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1517This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1518and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1519duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1520paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1521
7bdf4127
AB
1522@cindex group allocation in linker script
1523@cindex section groups
1524@cindex COMDAT
1525@kindex --force-group-allocation
1526@item --force-group-allocation
1527This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1528normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1529default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1530change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1531command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1532effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1533
252b5132 1534@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1535@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1536@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1537Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1538address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1539times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1540limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1541context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1542symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1543constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1544using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1545@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1546equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1547
1548@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1549@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1550@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1551@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1552@itemx --no-demangle
1553These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1554and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1555present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1556underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1557mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1558different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1559to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1560demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1561is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1562
1563@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1564@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1565@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1566@item -I@var{file}
1567@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1568Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1569generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1570linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1571doing.
1572
9b8b325a
RF
1573@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1574@item --no-dynamic-linker
1575When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1576linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1577executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1578entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1579
a70f34c0
NC
1580@kindex --embedded-relocs
1581@item --embedded-relocs
1582This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1583that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1584is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1585targets.
1586
3f0a5f17
ME
1587@kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1588@item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1589Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1590in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1591
7ce691ae 1592@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1593@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1594@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1595@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1596Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1597with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1598
252b5132
RH
1599@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1600@item --force-exe-suffix
1601Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1602
1603If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1604@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1605the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1606option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1607Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1608it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1609
1610@kindex --gc-sections
1611@kindex --no-gc-sections
1612@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1613@item --gc-sections
1614@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1615Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1616targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1617performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1618@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1619collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1620implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1621
d5465ba2
AM
1622@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1623examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1624symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1625command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1626referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1627libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1628referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1629the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
b69e1ff3
CC
1630relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1631@samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
d5465ba2 1632
ac69cbc6 1633This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1634@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
b69e1ff3
CC
1635specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1636@samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1637command in the linker script.
ac69cbc6 1638
c17d87de
NC
1639@kindex --print-gc-sections
1640@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1641@cindex garbage collection
1642@item --print-gc-sections
1643@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1644List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1645printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1646collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1647default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1648be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1649line.
1650
22185505 1651@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1652@cindex garbage collection
1653@item --gc-keep-exported
1654When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1655collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1656default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1657executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1658collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1659Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1660it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1661ELF format targets.
1662
30824704
RM
1663@kindex --print-output-format
1664@cindex output format
1665@item --print-output-format
1666Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1667other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1668in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1669
3604cb1f
TG
1670@kindex --print-memory-usage
1671@cindex memory usage
1672@item --print-memory-usage
1673Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1674the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1675quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1676headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1677parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1678
1679@smallexample
1680Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1681 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1682 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1683@end smallexample
1684
252b5132
RH
1685@cindex help
1686@cindex usage
1687@kindex --help
1688@item --help
1689Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1690
ea20a7da
CC
1691@kindex --target-help
1692@item --target-help
1693Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1694
2509a395
SL
1695@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1696@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1697Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1698@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1699
1700@cindex memory usage
1701@kindex --no-keep-memory
1702@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1703@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1704symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1705instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1706necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1707while linking a large executable.
1708
1709@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1710@kindex -z defs
97a232d7 1711@kindex -z undefs
252b5132 1712@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1713@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1714Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1715is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1716The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1717behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1718libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1719
97a232d7
NC
1720The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1721
aa713662
L
1722@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1723@kindex -z muldefs
1724@item --allow-multiple-definition
1725@itemx -z muldefs
1726Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1727report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1728first definition will be used.
1729
b79e8c78 1730@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1731@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1732@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1733@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1734Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1735This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1736determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1737shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1738how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1739
903249d7
NC
1740The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1741referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1742an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1743a shared library.
1744
1745The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1746libraries specified at link time are that:
1747
1748@itemize @bullet
1749@item
1750A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1751that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1752resolvable at load time.
1753@item
1754There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1755symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1756
1757The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1758select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1759architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1760appropriate memset function.
1761@end itemize
b79e8c78 1762
31941635
L
1763@kindex --no-undefined-version
1764@item --no-undefined-version
1765Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1766it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1767will be issued instead.
1768
3e3b46e5
PB
1769@kindex --default-symver
1770@item --default-symver
1771Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1772exported symbols.
1773
1774@kindex --default-imported-symver
1775@item --default-imported-symver
1776Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1777imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1778
252b5132
RH
1779@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1780@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1781Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1782files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1783been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1784This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1785errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1786have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1787inappropriate.
1788
fe7929ce
AM
1789@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1790@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1791Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1792library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1793
252b5132
RH
1794@kindex --no-whole-archive
1795@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1796Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1797archive files.
1798
1799@cindex output file after errors
1800@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1801@item --noinhibit-exec
1802Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1803Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1804errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1805when it issues any error whatsoever.
1806
0a9c1c8e
CD
1807@kindex -nostdlib
1808@item -nostdlib
1809Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1810command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1811(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1812
252b5132 1813@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1814@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1815@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1816@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1817file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1818@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1819object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1820object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1821should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1822usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1823name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1824list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1825command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1826this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1827@end ifclear
1828
76359541
TP
1829@kindex --out-implib
1830@item --out-implib @var{file}
1831Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1832the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1833library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1834may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1835behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1836step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1837the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1838
36af4a4e
JJ
1839@kindex -pie
1840@kindex --pic-executable
1841@item -pie
1842@itemx --pic-executable
1843@cindex position independent executables
1844Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1845ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1846libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1847address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1848normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1849defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1850
252b5132
RH
1851@kindex -qmagic
1852@item -qmagic
1853This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1854
1855@kindex -Qy
1856@item -Qy
1857This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1858
1859@kindex --relax
1860@cindex synthesizing linker
1861@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1862@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1863@item --relax
28d5f677 1864@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1865An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1866@ifset GENERIC
1867This option is only supported on a few targets.
1868@end ifset
1869@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1870@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132 1871@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1872@ifset XTENSA
1873@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1874@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1875@ifset M68HC11
1876@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1877@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1878@ifset NIOSII
1879@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1880@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1881@ifset POWERPC
1882@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1883@end ifset
252b5132 1884
28d5f677
NC
1885On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1886global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1887addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1888synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1889instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1890
1891On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1892debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1893@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1894This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1895family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1896@end ifset
1897
1898@ifset GENERIC
1899On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1900but ignored.
1901@end ifset
1902
28d5f677
NC
1903On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1904@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1905
252b5132
RH
1906@cindex retaining specified symbols
1907@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1908@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1909@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1910@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1911Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1912discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1913symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1914@ifset GENERIC
1915(such as VxWorks)
1916@end ifset
1917where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1918run-time memory.
1919
1920@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1921or symbols needed for relocations.
1922
1923You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1924line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1925
1926@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1927@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1928@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1929@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1930Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1931linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1932arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1933them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1934also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1935objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1936@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1937ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1938@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1939
ff5dcc92 1940The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1941SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1942@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1943runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1944options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1945gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1946file systems.
252b5132 1947
ff5dcc92 1948For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1949followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1950the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1951@end ifset
1952
1953@ifset GENERIC
1954@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1955@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1956@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1957When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1958happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1959of the input files.
1960
1961When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1962non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1963shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1964explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1965specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1966@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1967either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1968appearing multiple times.
1969
e680a6b6
NC
1970The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1971directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1972containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1973and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
197464-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1975
1976The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1977@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1978supported.
1979
28c309a2
NC
1980This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1981that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1982is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1983runtime linker would do.
1984
252b5132 1985The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1986libraries:
252b5132
RH
1987@enumerate
1988@item
ff5dcc92 1989Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1990@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1991Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1992between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1993specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1994used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1995at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1996by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1997the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1998@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1999On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
2000@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
2001environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 2002@item
ff5dcc92
SC
2003On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
2004directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 2005@item
a1b8d843 2006For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 2007variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 2008@item
ec4eb78a
L
2009For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2010@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2011libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2012@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2013@item
252b5132
RH
2014The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2015@item
2016For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2017exists, the list of directories found in that file.
2018@end enumerate
2019
2020If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2021warning and continue with the link.
2022@end ifset
2023
2024@kindex -shared
2025@kindex -Bshareable
2026@item -shared
2027@itemx -Bshareable
2028@cindex shared libraries
2029Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2030and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 2031shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
2032undefined symbols in the link.
2033
252b5132 2034@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
2035@item --sort-common
2036@itemx --sort-common=ascending
2037@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
2038This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2039ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2040sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2041eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2042between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2043specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 2044
2509a395
SL
2045@kindex --sort-section=name
2046@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
2047This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2048patterns in the linker script.
2049
2509a395
SL
2050@kindex --sort-section=alignment
2051@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
2052This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2053patterns in the linker script.
2054
a70f34c0
NC
2055@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2056@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2057This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2058.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2059post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2060
252b5132 2061@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2062@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2063Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2064each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2065size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2066
2067@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2068@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2069Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2070output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2071This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2072certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2073cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2074that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2075support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2076input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2077more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2078many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2079
2080@kindex --stats
2081@item --stats
2082Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2083as execution time and memory usage.
2084
2509a395 2085@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2086@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2087Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2088configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2089that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2090
a70f34c0
NC
2091@kindex --task-link
2092@item --task-link
2093This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2094file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2095
252b5132
RH
2096@kindex --traditional-format
2097@cindex traditional format
2098@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2099For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2100the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2101use the traditional format instead.
2102
2103@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2104For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2105symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2106full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2107@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2108trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2109combine duplicate entries.
2110
2509a395
SL
2111@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2112@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2113Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2114address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2115times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2116line.
2117@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2118for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2119@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2120should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2121sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2122
2509a395
SL
2123@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2124@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2125@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2126@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2127@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2128@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2129@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2130Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2131@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2132
2509a395
SL
2133@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2134@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2135@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2136When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2137byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2138
9d5777a3
RM
2139@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2140@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2141@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2142When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2143the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2144text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2145
0d705e9f
AM
2146@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2147@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2148@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2149When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2150model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2151
560e09e9
NC
2152@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2153@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2154Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2155values for @samp{method}:
2156
2157@table @samp
2158@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2159Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2160
2161@item report-all
da8bce14 2162Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2163
2164@item ignore-in-object-files
2165Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2166ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2167
2168@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2169Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2170ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2171when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2172libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2173command line.
2174@end table
2175
2176The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2177by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2178
2179Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2180unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2181can change this to a warning.
2182
1715a13c
L
2183@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2184@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2185@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2186@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2187Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2188supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2189the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2190argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2191
2192@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2193@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2194@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2195Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2196used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2197about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2198is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2199see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2200use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2201symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2202@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2203
7ce691ae 2204@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2205@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2206@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2207@item --warn-common
2208Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2209a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2210but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2211you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2212Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2213warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2214
2215There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2216
2217@table @samp
2218@item int i = 1;
2219A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2220file.
2221
2222@item extern int i;
2223An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2224There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2225variable somewhere.
2226
2227@item int i;
2228A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2229variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2230The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2231single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2232size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2233a definition of the same variable.
2234@end table
2235
2236The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2237Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2238just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2239encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2240a common symbol.
2241
2242@enumerate
2243@item
2244Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2245definition for the symbol.
2246@smallexample
2247@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2248 overridden by definition
2249@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2250@end smallexample
2251
2252@item
2253Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2254the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2255except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2256@smallexample
2257@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2258 overriding common
2259@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2260@end smallexample
2261
2262@item
2263Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2264@smallexample
2265@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2266 of `@var{symbol}'
2267@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2268@end smallexample
2269
2270@item
2271Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2272@smallexample
2273@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2274 overridden by larger common
2275@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2276@end smallexample
2277
2278@item
2279Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2280the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2281encountered in a different order.
2282@smallexample
2283@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2284 overriding smaller common
2285@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2286@end smallexample
2287@end enumerate
2288
2289@kindex --warn-constructors
2290@item --warn-constructors
2291Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2292object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2293detect the use of global constructors.
2294
2295@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2296@item --warn-multiple-gp
2297Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2298This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2299Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2300section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2301of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2302base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2303base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2304bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2305large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2306values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2307option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2308
2309@kindex --warn-once
2310@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2311@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2312@item --warn-once
2313Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2314which refers to it.
2315
2316@kindex --warn-section-align
2317@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2318@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2319@item --warn-section-align
2320Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2321alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2322The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2323is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2324the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2325
8fdd7217
NC
2326@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2327@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2328Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2329
a0c402a5
L
2330@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2331@item --warn-alternate-em
2332Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2333
560e09e9
NC
2334@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2335@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2336If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2337@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2338This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2339
2340@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2341@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2342This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2343it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2344
252b5132
RH
2345@kindex --whole-archive
2346@cindex including an entire archive
2347@item --whole-archive
2348For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2349@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2350in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2351files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2352library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2353library. This option may be used more than once.
2354
7ec229ce 2355Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2356about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2357Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2358list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2359your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2360
2509a395
SL
2361@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2362@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2363Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2364@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2365undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2366@var{symbol}.
2367
2368This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2369wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2370wishes to call the system function, it should call
2371@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2372
2373Here is a trivial example:
2374
2375@smallexample
2376void *
cc2f008e 2377__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2378@{
cc2f008e 2379 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2380 return __real_malloc (c);
2381@}
2382@end smallexample
2383
ff5dcc92 2384If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2385all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2386instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2387call the real @code{malloc} function.
2388
2389You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2390links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2391you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2392file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2393call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2394
4ea904ed
SH
2395Only undefined references are replaced by the linker. So, translation unit
2396internal references to @var{symbol} are not resolved to
2397@code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. In the next example, the call to @code{f} in
2398@code{g} is not resolved to @code{__wrap_f}.
2399
2400@smallexample
2401int
2402f (void)
2403@{
2404 return 123;
2405@}
2406
2407int
2408g (void)
2409@{
2410 return f();
2411@}
2412@end smallexample
2413
6aa29e7b 2414@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2415@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2416@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2417@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2418Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2419(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2420section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2421
e41b3a13
JJ
2422@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2423@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2424Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2425generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2426if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2427
6c1439be
L
2428@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2429@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2430@item --enable-new-dtags
2431@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2432This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2433systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2434@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2435and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2436If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2437created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2438those options are only available for ELF systems.
2439
2d643429 2440@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2441@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2442Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2443close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2444time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2445increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2446value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2447
fdc90cb4
JJ
2448@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2449@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2450Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2451@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2452new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2453the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
c8455dc9
NC
2454hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2455but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
fdc90cb4 2456
0ce398f1
L
2457@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2458@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2459@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2460@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2461@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2462@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2463@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2464@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2465On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2466compressed using zlib.
2467
2468@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2469sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2470DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2471instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2472also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2473sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2474
2475The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2476@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2477
2478Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2479sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2480for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2481uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2482
2483The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2484involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2485default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2486@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2487
35835446
JR
2488@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2489@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2490This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2491linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2492for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2493about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2494
4f9c04f7 2495Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 24961021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2497run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2498has been used.
2499
2500The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2501enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2502
c0065db7
RM
2503@kindex --build-id
2504@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2505@item --build-id
2506@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2507Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2508or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2509unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2510@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2511@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2512@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2513the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2514string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2515@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2516is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2517
2518The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2519that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2520unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2521to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2522file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2523string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2524
2525Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2526@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2527@end table
2528
0285c67d
NC
2529@c man end
2530
36f63dca 2531@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2532
0285c67d
NC
2533@c man begin OPTIONS
2534
ff5dcc92 2535The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2536the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2537normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2538use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2539@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2540like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2541symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2542object file).
2543
2544In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
a05a5b64 2545support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
252b5132
RH
2546PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2547values by either a space or an equals sign.
2548
ff5dcc92 2549@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2550
2551@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2552@item --add-stdcall-alias
2553If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2554as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2555[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2556
2557@kindex --base-file
2558@item --base-file @var{file}
2559Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2560addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2561@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2562[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2563
2564@kindex --dll
2565@item --dll
2566Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2567@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2568file.
bb10df36 2569[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2570
88183869
DK
2571@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2572@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2573@item --enable-long-section-names
2574@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2575The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2576the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2577for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2578fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2579to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2580allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2581disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2582generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2583as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2584with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2585GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2586information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2587option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2588section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2589when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2590image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2591[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2592
252b5132
RH
2593@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2594@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2595@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2596@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2597If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2598do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2599only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2600resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2601undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2602@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2603to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2604warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2605import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2606to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2607feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2608@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2609mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2610[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2611
522f09cd
KT
2612@kindex --leading-underscore
2613@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2614@item --leading-underscore
2615@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2616For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2617in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2618disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2619
252b5132
RH
2620@cindex DLLs, creating
2621@kindex --export-all-symbols
2622@item --export-all-symbols
2623If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2624be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2625otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2626explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2627attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2628option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2629@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2630@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2631exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2632re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2633such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2634@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2635@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2636Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2637not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2638extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2639(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2640These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2641@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2642@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2643@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2644@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2645[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2646
2647@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2648@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2649Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2650exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2651[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2652
2927aaca
NC
2653@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2654@item --exclude-all-symbols
2655Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2656[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2657
252b5132
RH
2658@kindex --file-alignment
2659@item --file-alignment
2660Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2661file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2662512.
bb10df36 2663[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2664
2665@cindex heap size
2666@kindex --heap
2667@item --heap @var{reserve}
2668@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2669Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2670to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2671committed.
bb10df36 2672[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2673
2674@cindex image base
2675@kindex --image-base
2676@item --image-base @var{value}
2677Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2678the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2679is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2680your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2681other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2682for dlls.
bb10df36 2683[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2684
2685@kindex --kill-at
2686@item --kill-at
2687If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2688symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2689[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2690
26d2d8a2
BF
2691@kindex --large-address-aware
2692@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2693If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2694header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2695greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2696or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2697section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2698[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2699
f69a2f97
NC
2700@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2701@item --disable-large-address-aware
2702Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2703This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2704driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2705addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2706[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2707
252b5132
RH
2708@kindex --major-image-version
2709@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2710Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2711[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2712
2713@kindex --major-os-version
2714@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2715Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2716[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2717
2718@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2719@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2720Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2721[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2722
2723@kindex --minor-image-version
2724@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2725Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2726[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2727
2728@kindex --minor-os-version
2729@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2730Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2731[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2732
2733@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2734@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2735Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2736[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2737
2738@cindex DEF files, creating
2739@cindex DLLs, creating
2740@kindex --output-def
2741@item --output-def @var{file}
2742The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2743file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2744(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2745library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2746automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2747[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2748
b044cda1 2749@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2750@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2751@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2752@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2753Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2754@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2755By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2756for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2757execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2758[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2759
2760@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2761@item --disable-auto-image-base
2762Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2763user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2764default.
bb10df36 2765[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2766
2767@cindex DLLs, linking to
2768@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2769@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2770When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2771search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2772@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2773between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2774uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2775@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2776[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2777
2778@kindex --enable-auto-import
2779@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e 2780Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
317ff008
EB
2781DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2782mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2783[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2784
2785The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2786feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2787
2788Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2789of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2790PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
4d8907ac 2791
e2a83dd0
NC
2792Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2793data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2794placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2795around a problem with consts that is described here:
2796http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2797
4d8907ac
DS
2798Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2799see this message:
0d888aac 2800
ece2d90e 2801"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2802documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2803
ece2d90e
NC
2804This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2805ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2806allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2807fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2808constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2809multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2810this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2811of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2812the warning, and exit.
2813
2814There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2815data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2816
2fa9fc65
NC
2817One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2818of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2819this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2820
c0065db7
RM
2821A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2822that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2823there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2824a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2825
2826@example
2827extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2828extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2829 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2830@end example
2831
2832or
2833
2834@example
2835extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2836extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2837 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2838@end example
2839
c0065db7 2840For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2841is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2842
2843@example
2844extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2845extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2846 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2847@end example
2848
c406afaf
NC
2849or
2850
2851@example
2852extern long long extern_ll;
2853extern_ll -->
2854 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2855@end example
2856
2fa9fc65 2857A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2858'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2859@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2860requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2861building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2862merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2863between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2864constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2865
2866Original:
2867@example
2868--foo.h
2869extern int arr[];
2870--foo.c
2871#include "foo.h"
2872void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2873 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2874@}
2875@end example
2876
2877Solution 1:
2878@example
2879--foo.h
2880extern int arr[];
2881--foo.c
2882#include "foo.h"
2883void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2884 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2885 volatile int *parr = arr;
2886 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2887@}
2888@end example
2889
2890Solution 2:
2891@example
2892--foo.h
2893/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2894#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2895 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2896#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2897#else
2898#define FOO_IMPORT
2899#endif
2900extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2901--foo.c
2902#include "foo.h"
2903void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2904 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2905@}
2906@end example
2907
c0065db7 2908A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2909library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2910for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2911functions).
b044cda1
CW
2912
2913@kindex --disable-auto-import
2914@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2915Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2916@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2917[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2918
2fa9fc65
NC
2919@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2920@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2921If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2922that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2923a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2924environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2925[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2926
2927@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2928@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
317ff008 2929Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2930[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2931
b044cda1
CW
2932@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2933@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2934Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2935[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2936
252b5132
RH
2937@kindex --section-alignment
2938@item --section-alignment
2939Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2940addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2941[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2942
2943@cindex stack size
2944@kindex --stack
2945@item --stack @var{reserve}
2946@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2947Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2948to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2949committed.
bb10df36 2950[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2951
2952@kindex --subsystem
2953@item --subsystem @var{which}
2954@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2955@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2956Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2957legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2958@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2959the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2960@var{which}.
bb10df36 2961[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2962
2f563b51
DK
2963The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2964of the PE file header:
2965[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2966
2d5c3743
NC
2967@kindex --high-entropy-va
2968@item --high-entropy-va
2969Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2970(ASLR).
2971
2f563b51
DK
2972@kindex --dynamicbase
2973@item --dynamicbase
2974The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2975randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2976Vista for i386 PE targets.
2977
2978@kindex --forceinteg
2979@item --forceinteg
2980Code integrity checks are enforced.
2981
2982@kindex --nxcompat
2983@item --nxcompat
2984The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2985This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2986
2987@kindex --no-isolation
2988@item --no-isolation
2989Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2990
2991@kindex --no-seh
2992@item --no-seh
2993The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2994this image.
2995
2996@kindex --no-bind
2997@item --no-bind
2998Do not bind this image.
2999
3000@kindex --wdmdriver
3001@item --wdmdriver
3002The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 3003
2f563b51
DK
3004@kindex --tsaware
3005@item --tsaware
3006The image is Terminal Server aware.
3007
0cb112f7
CF
3008@kindex --insert-timestamp
3009@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
3010@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
3011Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
3012as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
3013other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 3014will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
3015same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
3016can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 3017that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 3018identically.
252b5132
RH
3019@end table
3020
0285c67d
NC
3021@c man end
3022
ac145307
BS
3023@ifset C6X
3024@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
3025
3026@c man begin OPTIONS
3027
3028The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3029libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3030all executables use an index of 0.
3031
3032@table @gcctabopt
3033
3034@kindex --dsbt-size
3035@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 3036This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
3037or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3038entries.
3039
3040@kindex --dsbt-index
3041@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3042This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3043to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3044executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3045@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3046
fbd9ad90
PB
3047@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3048The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3049exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3050
ac145307
BS
3051@end table
3052
3053@c man end
3054@end ifset
3055
b8891f8d
AJ
3056@ifset CSKY
3057@subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3058
3059@c man begin OPTIONS
3060
3061@table @gcctabopt
3062
3063@kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3064@item --branch-stub
3065This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3066sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3067usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3068can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3069the compiler or assembler.
3070
3071@kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3072@item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3073This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3074It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3075be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3076stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3077sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3078@samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3079linker should choose suitable defaults.
3080
3081@end table
3082
3083@c man end
3084@end ifset
3085
93fd0973
SC
3086@ifset M68HC11
3087@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3088
3089@c man begin OPTIONS
3090
3091The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3092memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3093
3094@table @gcctabopt
3095
3096@kindex --no-trampoline
3097@item --no-trampoline
3098This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3099is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3100instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3101
3102@kindex --bank-window
3103@item --bank-window @var{name}
3104This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3105the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3106The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3107paging and addresses within the memory window.
3108
3109@end table
3110
3111@c man end
3112@end ifset
3113
7fb9f789
NC
3114@ifset M68K
3115@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3116
3117@c man begin OPTIONS
3118
3119The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3120when linking for 68K targets.
3121
3122@table @gcctabopt
3123
3124@kindex --got
3125@item --got=@var{type}
3126This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3127@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3128@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3129Info entry for @file{ld}.
3130
3131@end table
3132
3133@c man end
3134@end ifset
3135
833794fc
MR
3136@ifset MIPS
3137@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3138
3139@c man begin OPTIONS
3140
3141The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3142generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3143linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3144
3145@table @gcctabopt
3146
3147@kindex --insn32
3148@item --insn32
3149@kindex --no-insn32
3150@itemx --no-insn32
3151These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3152generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3153or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
315432-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3155used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3156possible.
3157
8b10b0b3
MR
3158@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3159@item --ignore-branch-isa
3160@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3161@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3162These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3163transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3164accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3165is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3166instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3167equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3168calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3169a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3170an error.
3171
833794fc
MR
3172@end table
3173
3174@c man end
3175@end ifset
3176
252b5132
RH
3177@ifset UsesEnvVars
3178@node Environment
3179@section Environment Variables
3180
0285c67d
NC
3181@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3182
560e09e9 3183You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3184@ifclear SingleFormat
3185@code{GNUTARGET},
3186@end ifclear
3187@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3188
36f63dca 3189@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3190@kindex GNUTARGET
3191@cindex default input format
3192@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3193use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3194of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3195@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3196of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3197attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3198this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3199there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3200object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3201BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3202in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3203@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3204
3205@kindex LDEMULATION
3206@cindex default emulation
3207@cindex emulation, default
3208@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3209@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3210behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3211available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3212the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3213variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3214linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3215
3216@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3217@cindex demangling, default
3218Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3219@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3220default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3221a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3222may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3223options.
3224
0285c67d
NC
3225@c man end
3226@end ifset
3227
252b5132
RH
3228@node Scripts
3229@chapter Linker Scripts
3230
3231@cindex scripts
3232@cindex linker scripts
3233@cindex command files
3234Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3235written in the linker command language.
3236
3237The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3238the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3239the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3240more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3241direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3242described below.
3243
3244The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3245yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
a05a5b64
TP
3246linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3247to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
252b5132
RH
3248such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3249
3250You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3251line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3252default linker script.
3253
3254You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3255to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3256Linker Scripts}.
3257
3258@menu
3259* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3260* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3261* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3262* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3263* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3264* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3265* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3266* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3267* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3268* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3269* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3270@end menu
3271
3272@node Basic Script Concepts
3273@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3274@cindex linker script concepts
3275We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3276describe the linker script language.
3277
3278The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3279file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3280@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3281The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3282purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3283among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3284section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3285in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3286
3287Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3288also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3289contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3290the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3291A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3292area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3293loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3294which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3295of debugging information.
3296
3297Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3298first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3299the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3300@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3301section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3302same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3303is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3304(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3305based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3306RAM address would be the VMA.
3307
3308You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3309program with the @samp{-h} option.
3310
3311Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3312@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3313has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3314information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3315will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3316static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3317referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3318
3319You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3320program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3321option.
3322
3323@node Script Format
3324@section Linker Script Format
3325@cindex linker script format
3326Linker scripts are text files.
3327
3328You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3329either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3330symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3331generally ignored.
3332
3333Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3334If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3335otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3336double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3337file name.
3338
3339You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3340@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3341to whitespace.
3342
3343@node Simple Example
3344@section Simple Linker Script Example
3345@cindex linker script example
3346@cindex example of linker script
3347Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3348
3349The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3350@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3351memory layout of the output file.
3352
3353The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3354describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3355code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3356@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3357Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3358your input files.
3359
3360For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
33610x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3362linker script which will do that:
3363@smallexample
3364SECTIONS
3365@{
3366 . = 0x10000;
3367 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3368 . = 0x8000000;
3369 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3370 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3371@}
3372@end smallexample
3373
3374You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3375followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3376descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3377
252b5132
RH
3378The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3379sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3380counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3381other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3382current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3383incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3384@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3385
3386The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3387required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3388after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3389which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3390wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3391means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3392
3393Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3394@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3395@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3396
3397The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3398the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3399at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3400output section, the value of the location counter will be
3401@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3402effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3403immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3404
3405The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3406alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3407example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3408sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3409may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3410sections.
3411
3412That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3413
3414@node Simple Commands
3415@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3416@cindex linker script simple commands
3417In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3418
3419@menu
3420* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3421* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3422@ifclear SingleFormat
3423* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3424@end ifclear
3425
4a93e180 3426* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3427* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3428@end menu
3429
3430@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3431@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3432@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3433@cindex start of execution
3434@cindex first instruction
3435@cindex entry point
3436The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3437point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3438entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3439@smallexample
3440ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3441@end smallexample
3442
3443There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3444entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3445stopping when one of them succeeds:
3446@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3447@item
252b5132 3448the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3449@item
252b5132 3450the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3451@item
3ab904c4 3452the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
8a758655 3453targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
3ab904c4 3454check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3455@item
252b5132 3456the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3457@item
252b5132
RH
3458The address @code{0}.
3459@end itemize
3460
3461@node File Commands
36f63dca 3462@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3463@cindex linker script file commands
3464Several linker script commands deal with files.
3465
3466@table @code
3467@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3468@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3469@cindex including a linker script
3470Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3471be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3472with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
347310 levels deep.
3474
4006703d
NS
3475You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3476@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3477
252b5132
RH
3478@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3479@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3480@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3481@cindex input files in linker scripts
3482@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3483@cindex linker script input object files
3484The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3485in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3486
3487For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3488a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3489then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3490
3491In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3492script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3493
e3f2db7f
AO
3494In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3495with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3496located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3497for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3498open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3499linker will search through the archive library search path.
3500The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3aa2d05a
NC
3501as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3502path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
a05a5b64 3503@ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3504
ff5dcc92 3505If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
a05a5b64 3506name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
252b5132
RH
3507@samp{-l}.
3508
3509When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3510files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3511script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3512
3513@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3514@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3515@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3516@cindex grouping input files
3517The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3518files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3519new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
a05a5b64 3520in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3521
b717d30e
JJ
3522@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3523@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3524@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3525This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3526commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3527as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3528with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3529when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3530@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3531and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3532setting afterwards.
3533
252b5132
RH
3534@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3535@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3536@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3537The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3538@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3539@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
a05a5b64 3540Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
252b5132
RH
3541precedence.
3542
3543You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3544output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3545
3546@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3547@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3548@cindex library search path in linker script
3549@cindex archive search path in linker script
3550@cindex search path in linker script
3551The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3552@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132 3553@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
a05a5b64 3554on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
252b5132 3555are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
a05a5b64 3556the command-line option are searched first.
252b5132
RH
3557
3558@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3559@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3560@cindex first input file
3561The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3562that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3563though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3564when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3565first file.
3566@end table
3567
3568@ifclear SingleFormat
3569@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3570@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3571A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3572
3573@table @code
3574@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3575@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3576@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3577@cindex output file format in linker script
3578The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3579output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3580exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3581(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
252b5132
RH
3582line option takes precedence.
3583
3584You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
a05a5b64 3585formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
252b5132
RH
3586This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3587desired endianness.
3588
3589If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3590will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3591output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3592used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3593
3594For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3595command:
3596@smallexample
3597OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3598@end smallexample
3599This says that the default format for the output file is
a05a5b64 3600@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
252b5132
RH
3601option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3602format.
3603
3604@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3605@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3606@cindex input file format in linker script
3607The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3608files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3609This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3610(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
252b5132
RH
3611is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3612command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3613@end table
3614@end ifclear
3615
4a93e180
NC
3616@node REGION_ALIAS
3617@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3618@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3619@cindex region alias
3620@cindex region names
3621
3622Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3623@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3624
3625@smallexample
3626REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3627@end smallexample
3628
3629The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3630memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3631to memory regions. An example follows.
3632
3633Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3634memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3635that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3636non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3637access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3638read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3639sections:
3640
3641@itemize @bullet
3642@item
3643@code{.text} program code;
3644@item
3645@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3646@item
3647@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3648@item
3649@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3650@end itemize
3651
3652The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3653part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3654output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3655systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3656@code{C}:
3657@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3658@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3659@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3660@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3661@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3662@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3663@end multitable
3664The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3665loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3666the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3667the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3668
3669The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3670includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3671memory layout:
3672@smallexample
3673INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3674
3675SECTIONS
3676 @{
3677 .text :
3678 @{
3679 *(.text)
3680 @} > REGION_TEXT
3681 .rodata :
3682 @{
3683 *(.rodata)
3684 rodata_end = .;
3685 @} > REGION_RODATA
3686 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3687 @{
3688 data_start = .;
3689 *(.data)
3690 @} > REGION_DATA
3691 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3692 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3693 .bss :
3694 @{
3695 *(.bss)
3696 @} > REGION_BSS
3697 @}
3698@end smallexample
3699
3700Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3701regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3702variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3703@table @code
3704@item A
3705Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3706@smallexample
3707MEMORY
3708 @{
3709 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3710 @}
3711
3712REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3713REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3714REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3715REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3716@end smallexample
3717@item B
3718Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3719into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3720@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3721@smallexample
3722MEMORY
3723 @{
3724 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3725 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3726 @}
3727
3728REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3729REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3730REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3731REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3732@end smallexample
3733@item C
3734Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3735@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3736initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3737system start into the @code{RAM}.
3738@smallexample
3739MEMORY
3740 @{
3741 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3742 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3743 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3744 @}
3745
3746REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3747REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3748REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3749REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3750@end smallexample
3751@end table
3752
3753It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3754@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3755necessary:
3756@smallexample
3757#include <string.h>
3758
3759extern char data_start [];
3760extern char data_size [];
3761extern char data_load_start [];
3762
3763void copy_data(void)
3764@{
3765 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3766 @{
3767 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3768 @}
3769@}
3770@end smallexample
3771
252b5132 3772@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3773@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3774There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3775
3776@table @code
3777@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3778@kindex ASSERT
3779@cindex assertion in linker script
3780Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3781with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3782
fd1c4238
NC
3783Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3784take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3785inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3786for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3787symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3788
3789@smallexample
3790 .stack :
3791 @{
3792 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3793 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3794 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3795 @}
3796@end smallexample
3797
3798will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3799PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3800can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3801
3802@smallexample
3803 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3804 .stack :
3805 @{
3806 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3807 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3808 @}
3809@end smallexample
3810
3811will work.
3812
252b5132
RH
3813@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3814@kindex EXTERN
3815@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3816Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3817symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3818modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3819each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3820command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3821
3822@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3823@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3824@cindex common allocation in linker script
3825This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3826to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3827output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3828
4818e05f
AM
3829@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3830@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3831@cindex common allocation in linker script
3832This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3833command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3834to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3835
7bdf4127
AB
3836@item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3837@kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3838@cindex group allocation in linker script
3839@cindex section groups
3840@cindex COMDAT
3841This command has the same effect as the
3842@samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3843@command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3844and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3845specified (@samp{-r}).
3846
53d25da6
AM
3847@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3848@kindex INSERT
3849@cindex insert user script into default script
3850This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3851augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3852inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3853@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3854default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3855sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3856linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3857insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3858linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3859default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3860of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3861to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3862is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3863
3864@smallexample
3865SECTIONS
3866@{
3867 OVERLAY :
3868 @{
3869 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3870 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3871 @}
3872@}
3873INSERT AFTER .text;
3874@end smallexample
3875
252b5132
RH
3876@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3877@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3878@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3879This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3880references among certain output sections.
3881
3882In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3883using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3884will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3885errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3886a function defined in the other section.
3887
3888The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3889@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3890an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3891@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3892names.
3893
cdf96953
MF
3894@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3895@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3896@cindex cross references
3897This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3898references to one section from a list of other sections.
3899
3900The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3901output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3902a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3903there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3904must never call back.
3905
3906The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3907The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3908If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3909the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3910status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3911names, not input section names.
3912
252b5132
RH
3913@ifclear SingleFormat
3914@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3915@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3916@cindex machine architecture
3917@cindex architecture
3918Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3919of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3920architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3921the @samp{-f} option.
3922@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3923
3924@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3925@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3926This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3927@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3928in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3929@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3930@end table
3931
3932@node Assignments
3933@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3934@cindex assignment in scripts
3935@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3936@cindex variables, defining
3937You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3938the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3939
3940@menu
3941* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3942* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3943* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3944* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3945* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3946@end menu
3947
3948@node Simple Assignments
3949@subsection Simple Assignments
3950
3951You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3952
3953@table @code
3954@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3955@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3956@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3957@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3958@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3959@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3960@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3961@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3962@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3963@end table
3964
3965The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3966@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3967defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3968
3969The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3970may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3971
3972The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3973
3974Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3975
3976You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3977statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3978section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3979
3980The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3981expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3982
3983Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3984assignments may be used:
3985
3986@smallexample
3987floating_point = 0;
3988SECTIONS
3989@{
3990 .text :
3991 @{
3992 *(.text)
3993 _etext = .;
3994 @}
156e34dd 3995 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3996 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3997@}
3998@end smallexample
3999@noindent
4000In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
4001zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
4002the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
4003defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
4004upward to a 4 byte boundary.
4005
eb8476a6
MR
4006@node HIDDEN
4007@subsection HIDDEN
4008@cindex HIDDEN
4009For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
4010exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4011
4012Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
4013@code{HIDDEN}:
4014
4015@smallexample
4016HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
4017SECTIONS
4018@{
4019 .text :
4020 @{
4021 *(.text)
4022 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
4023 @}
4024 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
4025 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4026@}
4027@end smallexample
4028@noindent
4029In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
4030
252b5132
RH
4031@node PROVIDE
4032@subsection PROVIDE
4033@cindex PROVIDE
4034In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
4035only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
4036the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
4037@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
4038@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
4039@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
4040@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4041@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4042
4043Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4044@smallexample
4045SECTIONS
4046@{
4047 .text :
4048 @{
4049 *(.text)
4050 _etext = .;
4051 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4052 @}
4053@}
4054@end smallexample
4055
4056In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4057underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4058the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4059underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4060If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4061linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4062
b0daac83
NC
4063Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4064defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4065that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4066when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4067@samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4068
7af8e998
L
4069@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4070@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4071@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4072Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4073hidden and won't be exported.
4074
73ae6183
NC
4075@node Source Code Reference
4076@subsection Source Code Reference
4077
4078Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4079intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4080a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4081symbol that does not have a value.
4082
4083Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4084transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4085stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4086prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4087mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4088of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4089variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4090linker script variable might be referred to as:
4091
4092@smallexample
4093 extern int foo;
4094@end smallexample
4095
4096But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4097
4098@smallexample
4099 _foo = 1000;
4100@end smallexample
4101
4102In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4103transformation has taken place.
4104
4105When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4106things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4107in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4108second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4109table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4110contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4111value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4112
4113@smallexample
4114 int foo = 1000;
4115@end smallexample
4116
10bf6894 4117creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
4118holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4119number 1000 is initially stored.
4120
4121When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4122first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4123memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4124So:
4125
4126@smallexample
4127 foo = 1;
4128@end smallexample
4129
4130looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4131associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4132address. Whereas:
4133
4134@smallexample
4135 int * a = & foo;
4136@end smallexample
4137
10bf6894 4138looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4139and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4140the variable @samp{a}.
4141
4142Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4143the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4144an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4145
4146@smallexample
4147 foo = 1000;
4148@end smallexample
4149
4150creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4151the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4152address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4153linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4154access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4155
4156Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4157you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4158use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4159section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4160linker script contains these declarations:
4161
4162@smallexample
4163@group
4164 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4165 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4166 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4167@end group
4168@end smallexample
4169
4170Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4171
4172@smallexample
4173@group
4174 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4175
73ae6183
NC
4176 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4177@end group
4178@end smallexample
4179
4180Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4181Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4182arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4183
4184@smallexample
4185@group
4186 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4187
4188 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4189@end group
4190@end smallexample
4191
4192Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4193operators.
73ae6183 4194
252b5132 4195@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4196@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4197@kindex SECTIONS
4198The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4199into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4200
4201The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4202@smallexample
4203SECTIONS
4204@{
4205 @var{sections-command}
4206 @var{sections-command}
4207 @dots{}
4208@}
4209@end smallexample
4210
4211Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4212
4213@itemize @bullet
4214@item
4215an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4216@item
4217a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4218@item
4219an output section description
4220@item
4221an overlay description
4222@end itemize
4223
4224The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4225@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4226those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4227understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4228the layout of the output file.
4229
4230Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4231below.
4232
4233If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4234linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4235section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4236input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4237example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4238in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4239
4240@menu
4241* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4242* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4243* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4244* Input Section:: Input section description
4245* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4246* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4247* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4248* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4249* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4250@end menu
4251
4252@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4253@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4254The full description of an output section looks like this:
4255@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4256@group
7e7d5768 4257@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4258 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4259 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4260 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4261 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4262 @{
4263 @var{output-section-command}
4264 @var{output-section-command}
4265 @dots{}
abc9061b 4266 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4267@end group
4268@end smallexample
4269
4270Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4271
4272The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4273name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4274The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4275the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4276The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4277
4278Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4279
4280@itemize @bullet
4281@item
4282a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4283@item
4284an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4285@item
4286data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4287@item
4288a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4289@end itemize
4290
4291@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4292@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4293@cindex name, section
4294@cindex section name
4295The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4296meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4297support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4298must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4299example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4300output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4301names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4302quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4303characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4304commas must be quoted.
4305
4306The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4307Discarding}.
4308
4309@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4310@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4311@cindex address, section
4312@cindex section address
4313The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4314address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4315is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4316
4317If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4318section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4319to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4320alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4321contained within the output section.
4322
4323The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4324
4325@itemize @bullet
4326@item
4327If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4328is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4329in that region.
4330
4331@item
4332If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4333regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4334section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4335be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4336
4337@item
4338If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4339the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4340counter.
4341@end itemize
4342
4343@noindent
4344For example:
4345
252b5132
RH
4346@smallexample
4347.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4348@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4349
252b5132
RH
4350@noindent
4351and
ea5cae92 4352
252b5132
RH
4353@smallexample
4354.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4355@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4356
252b5132
RH
4357@noindent
4358are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4359@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4360counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4361counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4362input sections.
252b5132
RH
4363
4364The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4365For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4366so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4367do something like this:
4368@smallexample
4369.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4370@end smallexample
4371@noindent
4372This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4373aligned upward to the specified value.
4374
4375Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4376location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4377sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4378
4379@node Input Section
36f63dca 4380@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4381@cindex input sections
4382@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4383The most common output section command is an input section description.
4384
4385The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4386You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4387in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4388map the input files into your memory layout.
4389
4390@menu
4391* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4392* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4393* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4394* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4395* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4396@end menu
4397
4398@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4399@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4400@cindex input section basics
4401An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4402by a list of section names in parentheses.
4403
4404The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4405describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4406
4407The most common input section description is to include all input
4408sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4409include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4410@smallexample
4411*(.text)
4412@end smallexample
4413@noindent
18625d54 4414Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4415@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4416of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4417match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4418example:
252b5132 4419@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4420EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4421@end smallexample
4422@noindent
4423will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4424and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4425placed inside the section list, for example:
4426@smallexample
b4346c09 4427*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4428@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4429@noindent
4430The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4431two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4432more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4433
4434There are two ways to include more than one section:
4435@smallexample
4436*(.text .rdata)
4437*(.text) *(.rdata)
4438@end smallexample
4439@noindent
4440The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4441@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4442first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4443they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4444@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4445@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4446
8f1732fc
AB
4447When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4448is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4449immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4450@smallexample
4451*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4452@end smallexample
4453@noindent
4454will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4455@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4456from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4457exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4458could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4459@smallexample
4460*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4461@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4462@noindent
4463Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4464before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4465all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4466@smallexample
4467EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4468@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4469
252b5132
RH
4470You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4471You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4472needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4473@smallexample
4474data.o(.data)
4475@end smallexample
4476
ae17ab41
CM
4477To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4478of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4479
4480Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4481
4482@smallexample
4483@group
4484SECTIONS @{
4485 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4486 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4487@}
4488@end group
4489@end smallexample
4490
4491In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4492input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4493@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4494@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4495whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4496
967928e9
AM
4497You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4498matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4499with no whitespace around the colon.
4500
4501@table @samp
4502@item archive:file
4503matches file within archive
4504@item archive:
4505matches the whole archive
4506@item :file
4507matches file but not one in an archive
4508@end table
4509
4510Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4511wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4512single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4513@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4514within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4515also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4516other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4517from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4518command.
4519
252b5132
RH
4520If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4521the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4522commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4523@smallexample
4524data.o
4525@end smallexample
4526
967928e9
AM
4527When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4528and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4529characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4530name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4531did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4532though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4533@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4534the archive search path.
4535
4536@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4537@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4538@cindex input section wildcards
4539@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4540@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4541@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4542In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4543name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4544
4545The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4546pattern for the file name.
4547
4548The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4549
4550@table @samp
4551@item *
4552matches any number of characters
4553@item ?
4554matches any single character
4555@item [@var{chars}]
4556matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4557character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4558@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4559@item \
4560quotes the following character
4561@end table
4562
4563When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4564will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4565Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4566exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4567@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4568a @samp{/} character.
4569
4570File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4571specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4572does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4573
4574If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4575appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4576will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4577sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4578@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4579@smallexample
4580.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4581.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4582@end smallexample
4583
bcaa7b3e 4584@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4585Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4586in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4587this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4588pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4589@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4590into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4591
bcaa7b3e
L
4592@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4593@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4594difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4595descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4596Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4597reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4598
02ecc8e9
L
4599@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4600@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4601difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4602ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4603encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4604
bcaa7b3e
L
4605@cindex SORT
4606@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4607
4608When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4609can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4610
4611@enumerate
4612@item
4613@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4614It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4615sections have the same name.
4616@item
4617@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4618It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4619sections have the same alignment.
4620@item
c0065db7 4621@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4622treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4623@item
4624@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4625is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4626@item
4627All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4628@end enumerate
4629
a05a5b64 4630When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
bcaa7b3e 4631section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
a05a5b64 4632takes precedence over the command-line option.
bcaa7b3e
L
4633
4634If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
a05a5b64 4635command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
bcaa7b3e
L
4636treated as nested sorting command.
4637
4638@enumerate
4639@item
4640@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4641@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4642@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4643@item
4644@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4645@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4646@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4647@end enumerate
4648
4649If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
a05a5b64 4650command-line option will be ignored.
bcaa7b3e 4651
eda680f8 4652@cindex SORT_NONE
a05a5b64 4653@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
eda680f8
L
4654section sorting option.
4655
252b5132
RH
4656If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4657@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4658precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4659
4660This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4661files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4662sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4663The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4664with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4665linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4666@smallexample
4667@group
4668SECTIONS @{
4669 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4670 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4671 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4672 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4673@}
4674@end group
4675@end smallexample
4676
4677@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4678@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4679@cindex common symbol placement
4680@cindex uninitialized data placement
4681A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4682file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4683linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4684named @samp{COMMON}.
4685
4686You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4687other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4688particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4689input files are placed in another section.
4690
4691In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4692@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4693@smallexample
4694.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4695@end smallexample
4696
4697@cindex scommon section
4698@cindex small common symbols
4699Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4700example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4701symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4702different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4703the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4704symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4705to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4706locations.
4707
4708@cindex [COMMON]
4709You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4710notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4711@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4712
4713@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4714@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4715@cindex KEEP
4716@cindex garbage collection
4717When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4718it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4719This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4720with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4721@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4722
4723@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4724@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4725The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4726to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4727start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4728@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4729follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4730@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4731@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4732All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4733files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4734
4735@smallexample
4736@group
4737SECTIONS @{
4738 outputa 0x10000 :
4739 @{
4740 all.o
4741 foo.o (.input1)
4742 @}
36f63dca
NC
4743@end group
4744@group
252b5132
RH
4745 outputb :
4746 @{
4747 foo.o (.input2)
4748 foo1.o (.input1)
4749 @}
36f63dca
NC
4750@end group
4751@group
252b5132
RH
4752 outputc :
4753 @{
4754 *(.input1)
4755 *(.input2)
4756 @}
4757@}
4758@end group
a1ab1d2a 4759@end smallexample
252b5132 4760
cbd0eecf
L
4761If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4762and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4763automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4764__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4765indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4766respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4767C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4768
252b5132 4769@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4770@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4771@cindex data
4772@cindex section data
4773@cindex output section data
4774@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4775@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4776@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4777@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4778@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4779You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4780@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4781an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4782parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4783value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4784counter.
4785
4786The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4787store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4788bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4789stored.
4790
4791For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4792of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4793@smallexample
4794BYTE(1)
4795LONG(addr)
4796@end smallexample
4797
4798When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4799same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4800target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4801@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4802@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4803
4804If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4805which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4806When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4807true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4808endianness of the first input object file.
4809
36f63dca 4810Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4811between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4812@smallexample
4813SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4814@end smallexample
4815whereas this will work:
4816@smallexample
4817SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4818@end smallexample
4819
252b5132
RH
4820@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4821@cindex holes, filling
4822@cindex unspecified memory
4823You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4824current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4825otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4826gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4827with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4828necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4829point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4830than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4831different parts of an output section.
4832
4833This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4834value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4835@smallexample
563e308f 4836FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4837@end smallexample
4838
4839The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4840section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4841part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4842entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4843precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4844expression.
252b5132
RH
4845
4846@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4847@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4848There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4849commands.
4850
4851@table @code
4852@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4853@cindex input filename symbols
4854@cindex filename symbols
4855@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4856The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4857The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4858file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4859the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4860
4861This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4862normally used for any other object file format.
4863
4864@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4865@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4866@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4867@item CONSTRUCTORS
4868When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4869unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4870destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4871arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4872automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4873For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4874linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4875@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4876ignored for other object file formats.
4877
4878The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4879constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4880Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4881the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4882first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4883of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4884compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4885formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4886@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4887the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4888destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4889@code{exit}.
4890
4891For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4892arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4893addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4894and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4895linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4896runtime code expects to see.
4897
4898@smallexample
4899 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4900 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4901 *(.ctors)
4902 LONG(0)
4903 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4904 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4905 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4906 *(.dtors)
4907 LONG(0)
4908 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4909@end smallexample
4910
4911If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4912which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4913are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4914are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4915command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4916@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4917@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4918@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4919
4920Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4921and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4922need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4923scripts.
4924
4925@end table
4926
4927@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4928@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4929@cindex discarding sections
4930@cindex sections, discarding
4931@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4932The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4933This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4934may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4935@smallexample
49c13adb 4936.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4937@end smallexample
4938@noindent
4939will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4940@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4941sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4942space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4943too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4944space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4945@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4946@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4947This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4948
a0976ea4 4949The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4950on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4951symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4952the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4953section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4954
4955@cindex /DISCARD/
4956The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4957input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4958section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4959
4960@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4961@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4962@cindex output section attributes
4963We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4964like this:
0c71d759 4965
252b5132 4966@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4967@group
7e7d5768 4968@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4969 [AT(@var{lma})]
4970 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4971 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4972 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4973 @{
4974 @var{output-section-command}
4975 @var{output-section-command}
4976 @dots{}
562d3460 4977 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4978@end group
4979@end smallexample
0c71d759 4980
252b5132
RH
4981We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4982@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4983remaining section attributes.
4984
a1ab1d2a 4985@menu
252b5132
RH
4986* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4987* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4988* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4989* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4990* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4991* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4992* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4993* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4994@end menu
4995
4996@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4997@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4998Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4999parentheses. The following types are defined:
5000
5001@table @code
5002@item NOLOAD
5003The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
5004loaded into memory when the program is run.
5005@item DSECT
5006@itemx COPY
5007@itemx INFO
5008@itemx OVERLAY
5009These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
5010rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
5011marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
5012section when the program is run.
5013@end table
5014
5015@kindex NOLOAD
5016@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
5017@cindex loading, preventing
5018The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
5019the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
5020the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
5021@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 5022need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
5023@smallexample
5024@group
5025SECTIONS @{
5026 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
5027 @dots{}
5028@}
5029@end group
5030@end smallexample
5031
5032@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 5033@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 5034@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
5035@kindex AT(@var{lma})
5036@cindex load address
5037@cindex section load address
5038Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
5039@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
5040@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5041specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5042address is optional.
6bdafbeb 5043
ea5cae92
NC
5044The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5045specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5046takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5047load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5048region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
5049
5050If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
5051section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5052load address:
5053
5054@itemize @bullet
5055@item
5056If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5057the LMA address as well.
5058
5059@item
5060If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5061
5062@item
5063Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5064with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5065section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5066VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5067the last section in the located region.
5068
5069@item
5070If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5071that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5072
5073@item
5074If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5075section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5076@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5077
5078@cindex ROM initialized data
5079@cindex initialized data in ROM
5080This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5081example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5082called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5083@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5084even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5085uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5086defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5087counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5088
5089@smallexample
5090@group
5091SECTIONS
5092 @{
5093 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 5094 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
5095 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5096 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5097 .bss 0x3000 :
5098 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5099@}
5100@end group
5101@end smallexample
5102
5103The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5104this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5105the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5106how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5107script.
5108
5109@smallexample
5110@group
5111extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5112char *src = &_etext;
5113char *dst = &_data;
5114
ea5cae92
NC
5115/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5116while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 5117 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 5118
ea5cae92 5119/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
5120for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5121 *dst = 0;
5122@end group
5123@end smallexample
5124
bbf115d3
L
5125@node Forced Output Alignment
5126@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5127@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5128@cindex forcing output section alignment
5129@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 5130You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
5131alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5132intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 5133
7e7d5768
AM
5134@node Forced Input Alignment
5135@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5136@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5137@cindex forcing input section alignment
5138@cindex input section alignment
5139You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5140SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5141sections, whether larger or smaller.
5142
0c71d759
NC
5143@node Output Section Constraint
5144@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5145@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5146@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5147@cindex constraints on output sections
5148You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5149of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5150read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5151@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5152
252b5132 5153@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5154@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5155@kindex >@var{region}
5156@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5157@cindex memory regions and sections
5158You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5159using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5160
5161Here is a simple example:
5162@smallexample
5163@group
5164MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5165SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5166@end group
5167@end smallexample
5168
5169@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5170@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5171@kindex :@var{phdr}
5172@cindex section, assigning to program header
5173@cindex program headers and sections
5174You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5175using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5176one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5177assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5178@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5179linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5180
5181Here is a simple example:
5182@smallexample
5183@group
5184PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5185SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5186@end group
5187@end smallexample
5188
5189@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5190@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5191@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5192@cindex section fill pattern
5193@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5194You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5195@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5196(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5197within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5198alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5199necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5200of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5201an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5202fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5203other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5204pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5205expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5206
5207You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5208output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5209
5210Here is a simple example:
5211@smallexample
5212@group
563e308f 5213SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5214@end group
5215@end smallexample
5216
5217@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5218@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5219@kindex OVERLAY
5220@cindex overlays
5221An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5222are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5223the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5224copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5225required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5226can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5227than another.
5228
5229Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5230@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5231output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5232command is as follows:
5233@smallexample
5234@group
5235OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5236 @{
5237 @var{secname1}
5238 @{
5239 @var{output-section-command}
5240 @var{output-section-command}
5241 @dots{}
5242 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5243 @var{secname2}
5244 @{
5245 @var{output-section-command}
5246 @var{output-section-command}
5247 @dots{}
5248 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5249 @dots{}
abc9061b 5250 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5251@end group
5252@end smallexample
5253
5254Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5255section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5256section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5257those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5258except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5259sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5260
abc9061b
CC
5261The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5262the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5263
252b5132
RH
5264The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5265addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5266memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5267whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5268and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5269and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5270
56dd11f0
NC
5271If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5272references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5273the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5274sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5275@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5276
5277For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5278provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5279defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5280@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5281the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5282within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5283symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5284
5285At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5286the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5287
5288Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5289@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5290@smallexample
5291@group
5292 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5293 @{
5294 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5295 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5296 @}
5297@end group
5298@end smallexample
5299@noindent
5300This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5301address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5302@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5303following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5304@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5305@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5306
5307C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5308like the following.
5309
5310@smallexample
5311@group
5312 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5313 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5314 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5315@end group
5316@end smallexample
5317
5318Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5319everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5320example could have been written identically as follows.
5321
5322@smallexample
5323@group
5324 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5325 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5326 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5327 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5328 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5329 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5330 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5331@end group
5332@end smallexample
5333
5334@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5335@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5336@kindex MEMORY
5337@cindex memory regions
5338@cindex regions of memory
5339@cindex allocating memory
5340@cindex discontinuous memory
5341The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5342memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5343
5344The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5345memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5346may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5347can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5348set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5349regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5350around to fit into the available regions.
5351
127fcdff
AB
5352A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5353however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5354specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5355@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5356@smallexample
5357@group
a1ab1d2a 5358MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5359 @{
5360 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5361 @dots{}
5362 @}
5363@end group
5364@end smallexample
5365
5366The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5367region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5368Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5369with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5370must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5371add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5372command.
252b5132
RH
5373
5374@cindex memory region attributes
5375The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5376whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5377not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5378@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5379section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5380the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5381them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5382
5383The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5384@table @samp
5385@item R
5386Read-only section
5387@item W
5388Read/write section
5389@item X
5390Executable section
5391@item A
5392Allocatable section
5393@item I
5394Initialized section
5395@item L
5396Same as @samp{I}
5397@item !
c09e9a8c 5398Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5399@end table
5400
81c688d5 5401If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
252b5132 5402@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
81c688d5
NC
5403attribute reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an
5404unmapped section will be placed in the memory region only if it does
5405not match any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute
5406string of @samp{RW!X} will match any unmapped section that has either
5407or both of the @samp{R} and @samp{W} attributes, but only as long as
5408the section does not also have the @samp{X} attribute.
252b5132
RH
5409
5410@kindex ORIGIN =
5411@kindex o =
5412@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5413The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5414the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5415cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5416abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5417@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5418
5419@kindex LENGTH =
5420@kindex len =
5421@kindex l =
5422The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5423region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5424be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5425@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5426
5427In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5428available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5429and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5430linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5431is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5432or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5433explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5434region.
5435
5436@smallexample
5437@group
a1ab1d2a 5438MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5439 @{
5440 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5441 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5442 @}
5443@end group
5444@end smallexample
5445
5446Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5447specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5448@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5449a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5450output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5451was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5452the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5453output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5454region, the linker will issue an error message.
5455
3ec57632 5456It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5457expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5458@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5459
5460@smallexample
5461@group
c0065db7 5462 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5463@end group
5464@end smallexample
5465
252b5132
RH
5466@node PHDRS
5467@section PHDRS Command
5468@kindex PHDRS
5469@cindex program headers
5470@cindex ELF program headers
5471@cindex program segments
5472@cindex segments, ELF
5473The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5474@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5475loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5476program with the @samp{-p} option.
5477
5478When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5479reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5480program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5481This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5482interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5483
5484The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5485in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5486precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5487the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5488not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5489
5490The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5491generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5492ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5493
5494This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5495@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5496
5497@smallexample
5498@group
5499PHDRS
5500@{
5501 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5502 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5503@}
5504@end group
5505@end smallexample
5506
5507The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5508of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5509header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5510with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5511must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5512is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5513
5514Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5515system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5516specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5517sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5518attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5519Section Phdr}.
5520
5521It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5522merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5523repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5524contain the section.
5525
5526If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5527then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5528not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5529convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5530placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5531default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5532segment at all.
5533
5534@kindex FILEHDR
5535@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5536You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5537the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5538The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5539file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5540include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5541segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5542these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5543
5544The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5545value of the keyword.
5546
5547@table @asis
5548@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5549Indicates an unused program header.
5550
5551@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5552Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5553the file.
5554
5555@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5556Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5557
5558@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5559Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5560found.
5561
5562@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5563Indicates a segment holding note information.
5564
5565@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5566A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5567ABI.
5568
5569@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5570Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5571
1a9ccd70
NC
5572@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5573Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5574
252b5132
RH
5575@item @var{expression}
5576An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5577be used for types not defined above.
5578@end table
5579
5580You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5581in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5582@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5583Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5584output section attribute.
5585
5586The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5587which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5588explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5589an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5590header.
5591
5592Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5593headers used on a native ELF system.
5594
5595@example
5596@group
5597PHDRS
5598@{
5599 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5600 interp PT_INTERP ;
5601 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5602 data PT_LOAD ;
5603 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5604@}
5605
5606SECTIONS
5607@{
5608 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5609 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5610 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5611 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5612 @dots{}
5613 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5614 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5615 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5616 @dots{}
5617@}
5618@end group
5619@end example
5620
5621@node VERSION
5622@section VERSION Command
5623@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5624@cindex symbol versions
5625@cindex version script
5626@cindex versions of symbols
5627The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5628only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5629symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5630a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5631shared library.
5632
5633You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5634you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5635also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5636
5637The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5638@smallexample
5639VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5640@end smallexample
5641
5642The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5643Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5644version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5645version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5646version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5647scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5648library.
5649
5650The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5651examples.
5652
5653@smallexample
5654VERS_1.1 @{
5655 global:
5656 foo1;
5657 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5658 old*;
5659 original*;
5660 new*;
252b5132
RH
5661@};
5662
5663VERS_1.2 @{
5664 foo2;
5665@} VERS_1.1;
5666
5667VERS_2.0 @{
5668 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5669 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5670 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5671 "f(int, double)";
5672 @};
252b5132
RH
5673@} VERS_1.2;
5674@end smallexample
5675
5676This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5677version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5678The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5679a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5680of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5681symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5682is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5683in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5684However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5685name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5686
5687Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5688depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5689to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5690
5691Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5692depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5693and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5694
5695When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5696specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5697unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5698unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5699somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5700wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5701wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5702set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5703ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5704
5705The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5706they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5707could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5708However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5709
0f6bf451 5710Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5711in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5712symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5713won't.
5714
5715@smallexample
7c9c73be 5716@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5717@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5718
252b5132
RH
5719When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5720symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5721requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5722shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5723loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5724linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5725application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5726way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5727all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5728search for each symbol reference.
5729
5730The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5731doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5732that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5733functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5734the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5735required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5736that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5737versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5738the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5739
5740There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5741first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5742source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5743script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5744maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5745@smallexample
5746__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5747@end smallexample
5748@noindent
5749in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5750be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5751The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5752@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5753takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5754
5755The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5756function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5757an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5758version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5759linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5760
5761To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5762source file. Here is an example:
5763
5764@smallexample
5765__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5766__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5767__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5768__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5769@end smallexample
5770
5771In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5772unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5773example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5774@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5775
5776When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5777some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5778this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5779@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5780declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5781you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5782
5783If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5784within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5785(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5786specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5787
cb840a31
L
5788You can also specify the language in the version script:
5789
5790@smallexample
5791VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5792@end smallexample
5793
c0065db7 5794The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5795The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5796demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5797patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5798@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5799
86043bbb
MM
5800Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5801described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5802or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5803the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5804whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5805cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5806might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5807should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5808expect when you upgrade.
5809
252b5132
RH
5810@node Expressions
5811@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5812@cindex expressions
5813@cindex arithmetic
5814The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5815that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5816expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5817host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5818
5819You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5820
5821The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5822expressions.
5823
5824@menu
5825* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5826* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5827* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5828* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5829* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5830* Operators:: Operators
5831* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5832* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5833* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5834@end menu
5835
5836@node Constants
5837@subsection Constants
5838@cindex integer notation
5839@cindex constants in linker scripts
5840All constants are integers.
5841
5842As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5843octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5844hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5845@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5846@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5847value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5848
5849@cindex scaled integers
5850@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5851@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5852@cindex suffixes for integers
5853@cindex integer suffixes
5854In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5855constant by
5856@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5857@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5858@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5859@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5860@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5861@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5862@tex
5863${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5864@end tex
5865@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5866respectively. For example, the following
5867all refer to the same quantity:
5868
252b5132 5869@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5870_fourk_1 = 4K;
5871_fourk_2 = 4096;
5872_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5873_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5874@end smallexample
5875
8a308ae8
NC
5876Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5877conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5878
0c71d759
NC
5879@node Symbolic Constants
5880@subsection Symbolic Constants
5881@cindex symbolic constants
5882@kindex CONSTANT
5883It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5884the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5885
5886@table @code
5887@item MAXPAGESIZE
5888@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5889The target's maximum page size.
5890
5891@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5892@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5893The target's default page size.
5894@end table
5895
5896So for example:
5897
5898@smallexample
9d5777a3 5899 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5900@end smallexample
5901
5902will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5903supported by the target.
5904
252b5132
RH
5905@node Symbols
5906@subsection Symbol Names
5907@cindex symbol names
5908@cindex names
5909@cindex quoted symbol names
5910@kindex "
5911Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5912and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5913Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5914specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5915keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5916@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5917"SECTION" = 9;
5918"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5919@end smallexample
5920
5921Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5922to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5923whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5924
ecca9871
L
5925@node Orphan Sections
5926@subsection Orphan Sections
5927@cindex orphan
5928Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5929are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5930script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
5931output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5932in which to place the orphaned input section.
5933
5934If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5935an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5936placed at the end of that output section.
5937
5938If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5939sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5940name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5941orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5942one new output section.
5943
5944If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5945then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
5946in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5947linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5948attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5949sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5950support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 5951
a05a5b64
TP
5952The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5953(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
c005eb9e
AB
5954output sections an orphan is placed in.
5955
252b5132
RH
5956@node Location Counter
5957@subsection The Location Counter
5958@kindex .
5959@cindex dot
5960@cindex location counter
5961@cindex current output location
5962The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5963current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5964location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5965within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5966anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5967
5968@cindex holes
5969Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5970moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5971location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5972and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5973doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5974
5975@smallexample
5976SECTIONS
5977@{
5978 output :
5979 @{
5980 file1(.text)
5981 . = . + 1000;
5982 file2(.text)
5983 . += 1000;
5984 file3(.text)
563e308f 5985 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5986@}
5987@end smallexample
5988@noindent
5989In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5990located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5991followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5992@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5993@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5994specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5995
5c6bbab8
NC
5996@cindex dot inside sections
5997Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5998current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5999statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
6000absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
6001however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
6002not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
6003
6004@smallexample
6005SECTIONS
6006@{
6007 . = 0x100
6008 .text: @{
6009 *(.text)
6010 . = 0x200
6011 @}
6012 . = 0x500
6013 .data: @{
6014 *(.data)
6015 . += 0x600
6016 @}
6017@}
6018@end smallexample
6019
6020The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
6021and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
6022the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
6023much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
6024move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
6025and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
6026the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
6027the @samp{.data} output section itself.
6028
b5666f2f
AM
6029@cindex dot outside sections
6030Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
6031output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
6032needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
6033
6034@smallexample
6035SECTIONS
6036@{
6037 start_of_text = . ;
6038 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6039 end_of_text = . ;
6040
6041 start_of_data = . ;
6042 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6043 end_of_data = . ;
6044@}
6045@end smallexample
6046
6047If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6048not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6049between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6050should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6051blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6052the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6053sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6054statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6055special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6056place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6057as follows:
6058
6059@smallexample
6060SECTIONS
6061@{
6062 start_of_text = . ;
6063 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6064 end_of_text = . ;
6065
6066 start_of_data = . ;
6067 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6068 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6069 end_of_data = . ;
6070@}
6071@end smallexample
6072
6073This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6074@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6075placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6076assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6077a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6078section. So you could write:
6079
6080@smallexample
6081SECTIONS
6082@{
6083 start_of_text = . ;
6084 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6085 end_of_text = . ;
6086
6087 . = . ;
6088 start_of_data = . ;
6089 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6090 end_of_data = . ;
6091@}
6092@end smallexample
6093
6094Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6095@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6096
252b5132
RH
6097@need 2000
6098@node Operators
6099@subsection Operators
6100@cindex operators for arithmetic
6101@cindex arithmetic operators
6102@cindex precedence in expressions
6103The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6104the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6105@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6106@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6107@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6108@smallexample
6109precedence associativity Operators Notes
6110(highest)
61111 left ! - ~ (1)
61122 left * / %
61133 left + -
61144 left >> <<
61155 left == != > < <= >=
61166 left &
61177 left |
61188 left &&
61199 left ||
612010 right ? :
612111 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6122(lowest)
6123@end smallexample
6124Notes:
a1ab1d2a 6125(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
6126(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6127@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6128@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6129@tex
6130\vskip \baselineskip
6131%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6132\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6133\hrule
6134\halign
6135{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6136height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6137&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6138height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6139\noalign{\hrule}
6140height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6141&highest&&&&&\cr
6142% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6143&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6144&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6145&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6146&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6147&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6148&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6149&7&&left&&|&\cr
6150&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6151&9&&left&&||&\cr
6152&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6153&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6154&lowest&&&&&\cr
6155height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6156\hrule}
6157@end tex
6158@iftex
6159{
6160@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6161@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6162@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6163}
6164@end iftex
6165@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6166
6167@node Evaluation
6168@subsection Evaluation
6169@cindex lazy evaluation
6170@cindex expression evaluation order
6171The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6172an expression when absolutely necessary.
6173
6174The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6175address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6176regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6177as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6178
6179However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6180until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6181other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6182for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6183
6184The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6185assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6186allocation.
6187
6188Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6189@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6190
6191If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6192available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6193following
6194@smallexample
6195@group
6196SECTIONS
6197 @{
a1ab1d2a 6198 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6199 @{ *(.text) @}
6200 @}
6201@end group
6202@end smallexample
6203@noindent
6204will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6205address}.
6206
6207@node Expression Section
6208@subsection The Section of an Expression
6209@cindex expression sections
6210@cindex absolute expressions
6211@cindex relative expressions
6212@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6213@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6214@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6215Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6216relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6217using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6218value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6219symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6220operations.
6221
abf4be64
AM
6222Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6223section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6224address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6225@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6226functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6227One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6228(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6229differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6230versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6231section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6232Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6233absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6234given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6235everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6236
6237In the following simple example,
252b5132 6238
7542af2a
AM
6239@smallexample
6240@group
6241SECTIONS
6242 @{
6243 . = 0x100;
6244 __executable_start = 0x100;
6245 .data :
6246 @{
6247 . = 0x10;
6248 __data_start = 0x10;
6249 *(.data)
6250 @}
6251 @dots{}
6252 @}
6253@end group
6254@end smallexample
252b5132 6255
7542af2a
AM
6256both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6257address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6258@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6259section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6260
5c3049d2
AM
6261For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6262addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6263
6264@itemize @bullet
6265@item
c05f749e
AM
6266Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6267operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6268absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6269@item
7542af2a
AM
6270Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6271relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6272and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6273@item
c05f749e
AM
6274Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6275in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6276address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6277before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6278@end itemize
6279
6280The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6281
6282@itemize @bullet
6283@item
6284An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6285@item
6286The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6287@item
9bc8bb33 6288The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6289relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6290(after above conversions) is also a number when
6291@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6292but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6293@item
6294The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6295relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6296section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6297@item
6298The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6299conversions) is an absolute address.
6300@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6301
6302You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6303to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6304create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6305section @samp{.data}:
6306@smallexample
6307SECTIONS
6308 @{
6309 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6310 @}
6311@end smallexample
6312@noindent
6313If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6314@samp{.data} section.
6315
7542af2a
AM
6316Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6317particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6318
252b5132
RH
6319@node Builtin Functions
6320@subsection Builtin Functions
6321@cindex functions in expressions
6322The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6323use in linker script expressions.
6324
6325@table @code
6326@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6327@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6328@cindex expression, absolute
6329Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6330of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6331value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6332normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6333
6334@item ADDR(@var{section})
6335@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6336@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6337Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6338script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6339the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6340@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6341@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6342the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6343@smallexample
6344@group
6345SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6346 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6347 @{
252b5132
RH
6348 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6349 @dots{}
6350 @}
6351 .output :
6352 @{
6353 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6354 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6355 @}
6356@dots{} @}
6357@end group
6358@end smallexample
6359
876f4090
NS
6360@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6361@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6362@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6363@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6364@cindex round up location counter
6365@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6366@cindex round up expression
6367@cindex align expression
6368Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6369to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6370doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6371arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6372expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6373equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6374
6375Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6376next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6377variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6378input sections:
252b5132
RH
6379@smallexample
6380@group
6381SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6382 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6383 *(.data)
6384 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6385 @}
6386@dots{} @}
6387@end group
6388@end smallexample
6389@noindent
6390The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6391a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6392a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6393of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6394
6395The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6396
362c1d1a
NS
6397@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6398@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6399@cindex section alignment
6400Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6401been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6402evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6403the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6404value in that section.
6405@smallexample
6406@group
6407SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6408 .output @{
6409 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6410 @dots{}
6411 @}
6412@dots{} @}
6413@end group
6414@end smallexample
6415
252b5132
RH
6416@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6417@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6418This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6419scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6420section.
6421
2d20f7bf
JJ
6422@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6423@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6424This is equivalent to either
6425@smallexample
6426(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6427@end smallexample
6428or
6429@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6430(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6431 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6432@end smallexample
6433@noindent
6434depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6435for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6436@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6437If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6438memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6439bytes in the on-disk file.
6440
6441This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6442any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6443@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
def5c83c
AM
6444be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6445running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6446that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6447page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
2d20f7bf
JJ
6448
6449@noindent
6450Example:
6451@smallexample
6452 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6453@end smallexample
6454
6455@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6456@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6457This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6458evaluation purposes.
6459
6460@smallexample
6461 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6462@end smallexample
6463
a4f5ad88
JJ
6464@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6465@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6466This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6467@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6468When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6469does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
def5c83c
AM
6470@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6471argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6472script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6473@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6474padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6475section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6476
6477@smallexample
6478 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6479@end smallexample
6480
252b5132
RH
6481@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6482@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6483@cindex symbol defaults
6484Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6485defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6486return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6487default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6488shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6489the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6490existed, its value is preserved:
6491
6492@smallexample
6493@group
6494SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6495 .text : @{
6496 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6497 @dots{}
6498 @}
6499 @dots{}
6500@}
6501@end group
6502@end smallexample
6503
3ec57632
NC
6504@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6505@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6506Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6507
252b5132
RH
6508@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6509@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6510@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6511Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6512Section LMA}).
6513
2e53f7d6
NC
6514@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6515@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6516Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6517@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6518
252b5132
RH
6519@kindex MAX
6520@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6521Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6522
6523@kindex MIN
6524@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6525Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6526
6527@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6528@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6529@cindex unallocated address, next
6530Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6531This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6532use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6533output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6534
3ec57632
NC
6535@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6536@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6537Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6538
ba916c8a
MM
6539@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6540@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6541Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6542value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6543@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6544will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6545can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6546``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6547name.
6548
252b5132
RH
6549@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6550@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6551@cindex section size
6552Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6553been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6554evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6555@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6556@smallexample
6557@group
6558SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6559 .output @{
6560 .start = . ;
6561 @dots{}
6562 .end = . ;
6563 @}
6564 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6565 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6566@dots{} @}
6567@end group
6568@end smallexample
6569
6570@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6571@itemx sizeof_headers
6572@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6573@cindex header size
6574Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6575information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6576this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6577choose, to facilitate paging.
6578
6579@cindex not enough room for program headers
6580@cindex program headers, not enough room
6581When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6582@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6583number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6584addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6585additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6586room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6587the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6588script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6589you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6590command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6591@end table
6592
6593@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6594@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6595@cindex implicit linker scripts
6596If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6597an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6598linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6599linker will report an error.
6600
6601An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6602
6603Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6604assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6605commands.
6606
6607Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6608at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6609read. This can affect archive searching.
6610
6611@ifset GENERIC
6612@node Machine Dependent
6613@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6614
6615@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6616@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6617sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6618functionality are not listed.
6619
6620@menu
36f63dca
NC
6621@ifset H8300
6622* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6623@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6624@ifset M68HC11
6625* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6626@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6627@ifset ARM
6628* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6629@end ifset
6630@ifset HPPA
6631* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6632@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6633@ifset M68K
6634* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6635@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6636@ifset MIPS
6637* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6638@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6639@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6640* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6641@end ifset
2469cfa2 6642@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6643* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6644@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6645@ifset NDS32
6646* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6647@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6648@ifset NIOSII
6649* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6650@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6651@ifset POWERPC
6652* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6653@end ifset
6654@ifset POWERPC64
6655* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6656@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
6657@ifset S/390
6658* S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6659@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6660@ifset SPU
6661* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6662@end ifset
74459f0e 6663@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6664* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6665@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6666@ifset WIN32
6667* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6668@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6669@ifset XTENSA
6670* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6671@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6672@end menu
6673@end ifset
6674
252b5132
RH
6675@ifset H8300
6676@ifclear GENERIC
6677@raisesections
6678@end ifclear
6679
6680@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6681@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6682
6683@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6684For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6685you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6686
6687@table @emph
6688@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6689@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6690@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6691targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6692program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6693respectively.
6694
6695@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6696@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6697@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6698@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6699sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6700page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6701(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6702@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6703top page of memory).
1502569c 6704
81f5558e
NC
6705@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6706indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6707displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6708the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6709@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6710whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6711range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6712
1502569c 6713@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6714@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6715biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6716which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6717page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6718(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6719@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6720the top page of memory).
6721
6722@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6723@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
672432 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6725changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6726(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6727@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6728the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6729@end table
6730
6731@ifclear GENERIC
6732@lowersections
6733@end ifclear
6734@end ifset
6735
36f63dca 6736@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6737@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6738@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6739@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6740@node Renesas
6741@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6742
c2dcd04e
NC
6743@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6744H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6745options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6746@end ifset
6747@end ifclear
6748
36f63dca
NC
6749@ifset ARM
6750@ifclear GENERIC
6751@raisesections
6752@end ifclear
6753
93fd0973
SC
6754@ifset M68HC11
6755@ifclear GENERIC
6756@raisesections
6757@end ifclear
6758
6759@node M68HC11/68HC12
6760@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6761
6762@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6763
6764@subsection Linker Relaxation
6765
6766For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6767optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6768
6769@table @emph
6770@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6771@item relaxing address modes
6772@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6773targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6774program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6775respectively.
6776
6777@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6778transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6779page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6780
6781@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6782When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6783of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6784addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6785@code{bset} instructions.
6786
6787@end table
6788
6789@subsection Trampoline Generation
6790
6791@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6792@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6793For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6794call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6795will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6796trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6797case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6798point to the function trampoline.
6799
6800@ifclear GENERIC
6801@lowersections
6802@end ifclear
6803@end ifset
6804
36f63dca 6805@node ARM
3674e28a 6806@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6807
6808@cindex ARM interworking support
6809@kindex --support-old-code
6810For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6811between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6812been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6813line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6814libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
a05a5b64 6815option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
36f63dca
NC
6816given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6817which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6818the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6819non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6820
6821@cindex thumb entry point
6822@cindex entry point, thumb
6823@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6824The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6825@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6826But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6827branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6828executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6829
ce11ba6c
KT
6830@cindex PE import table prefixing
6831@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6832The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6833the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6834element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6835import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6836
e489d0ae
PB
6837@cindex BE8
6838@kindex --be8
6839The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6840executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6841objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6842option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6843little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6844
3674e28a
PB
6845@cindex TARGET1
6846@kindex --target1-rel
6847@kindex --target1-abs
6848The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6849@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6850or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6851and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6852
6853@cindex TARGET2
6854@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6855The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6856@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6857meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6858@table @samp
6859@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6860@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6861@item abs
6862@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6863@item got-rel
6864@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6865@end table
6866
319850b4
JB
6867@cindex FIX_V4BX
6868@kindex --fix-v4bx
6869The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6870specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6871interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6872also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6873
6874In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6875linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6876@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6877
6878In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6879relocations are ignored.
6880
845b51d6
PB
6881@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6882@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6883Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6884relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6885
6886@smallexample
6887TST rM, #1
6888MOVEQ PC, rM
6889BX Rn
6890@end smallexample
6891
6892This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6893and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6894condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6895
33bfe774
JB
6896@cindex USE_BLX
6897@kindex --use-blx
6898The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6899BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6900situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6901code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6902each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6903
6904This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6905specify it if you are using that target.
6906
c6dd86c6
JB
6907@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6908@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6909The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6910bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6911instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6912to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6913the support code can read the intended values.
6914
6915The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6916intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6917and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6918intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6919full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6920you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6921
6922If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6923enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6924@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6925mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6926vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6927@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6928
6929If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6930potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6931such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6932first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6933instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6934the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6935are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6936
2de70689
MGD
6937@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6938@kindex --fix-arm1176
6939@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6940The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6941in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6942are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6943unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6944
9d5777a3 6945Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6946Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6947http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6948
a504d23a
LA
6949@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6950@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6951
6952The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6953workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6954the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6955off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6956the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6957core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6958integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6959VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6960
6961The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6962necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6963
6964The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6965@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6966STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6967linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6968@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6969
6970If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6971potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6972such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6973replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6974branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6975then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6976
6977The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6978the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6979
6980The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6981they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6982there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6983occurs.
6984
6985The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6986PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6987large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6988cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6989occurs.
6990
bf21ed78
MS
6991@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6992@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6993The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6994warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6995enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6996linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6997using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6998not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6999
7000@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
7001@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
7002The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7003warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7004@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7005linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
7006using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 7007
726150b7
NC
7008@cindex PIC_VENEER
7009@kindex --pic-veneer
7010The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7011ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7012is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7013@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7014
7015@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7016@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7017The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7018code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7019perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7020placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
a05a5b64 7021controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
726150b7 7022The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 7023duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
7024group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7025code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7026where they should be placed.
7027
7028The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7029@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 7030placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
7031branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7032placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7033value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7034exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7035A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7036linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7037from the input sections.
7038
7039The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7040@samp{N = +1}.
7041
1a51c1a4
NC
7042Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7043only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7044otherwise.
7045
1db37fe6
YG
7046@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7047@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7048@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7049The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7050
7051The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7052
68fcca92
JW
7053@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7054@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7055@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7056The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7057
7058Please contact ARM for further details.
7059
1db37fe6
YG
7060@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7061@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7062@cindex Merging exidx entries
7063The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7064
7065@kindex --long-plt
7066@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7067The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7068which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7069entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7070
1f56df9d
JW
7071@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7072@cindex AArch64 rela addend
7073The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7074link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7075
4ba2ef8f
TP
7076@cindex Placement of SG veneers
7077All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
a05a5b64 7078Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
4ba2ef8f
TP
7079@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7080veneers in memory.
7081
54ddd295
TP
7082@kindex --cmse-implib
7083@cindex Secure gateway import library
7084The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7085specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7086secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7087executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7088
0955507f
TP
7089@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7090@cindex Input import library
7091The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7092must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7093given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7094in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7095@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7096library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7097library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7098for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7099specified.
7100
36f63dca
NC
7101@ifclear GENERIC
7102@lowersections
7103@end ifclear
7104@end ifset
7105
7106@ifset HPPA
7107@ifclear GENERIC
7108@raisesections
7109@end ifclear
7110
7111@node HPPA ELF32
7112@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7113@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7114@kindex --multi-subspace
7115When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7116import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7117The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7118stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7119multiple sub-spaces.
7120
7121@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7122@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7123Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7124stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7125@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7126sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7127a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7128the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7129conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7130prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7131A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7132branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7133@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7134@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7135detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7136positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7137
7138Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7139single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7140create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7141large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7142
7143@ifclear GENERIC
7144@lowersections
7145@end ifclear
7146@end ifset
7147
7fb9f789
NC
7148@ifset M68K
7149@ifclear GENERIC
7150@raisesections
7151@end ifclear
7152
7153@node M68K
7154@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7155
7156@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7157@kindex --got=@var{type}
7158The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7159The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7160@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7161the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7162@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7163entries only at non-negative offsets.
7164@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7165entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7166support such GOTs.
7167@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7168output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7169file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7170files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7171
7172@ifclear GENERIC
7173@lowersections
7174@end ifclear
7175@end ifset
7176
833794fc
MR
7177@ifset MIPS
7178@ifclear GENERIC
7179@raisesections
7180@end ifclear
7181
7182@node MIPS
7183@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7184
7185@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7186@kindex --insn32
7187@kindex --no-insn32
7188The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7189microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7190in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7191used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7192or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7193including 16-bit ones where possible.
7194
8b10b0b3
MR
7195@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7196@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7197@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7198The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7199control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7200@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7201relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7202calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7203relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7204instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7205or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7206the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7207
833794fc
MR
7208@ifclear GENERIC
7209@lowersections
7210@end ifclear
7211@end ifset
7212
36f63dca
NC
7213@ifset MMIX
7214@ifclear GENERIC
7215@raisesections
7216@end ifclear
7217
7218@node MMIX
7219@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7220For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7221@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7222understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7223can translate between the two formats.
7224
7225There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7226Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7227registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7228equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7229@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7230global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7231this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7232symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7233
7a2de473
HPN
7234Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7235@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7236The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7237of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7238
7239Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7240are left out from an mmo file.
7241
7242@ifclear GENERIC
7243@lowersections
7244@end ifclear
7245@end ifset
7246
7247@ifset MSP430
7248@ifclear GENERIC
7249@raisesections
7250@end ifclear
7251
7252@node MSP430
7253@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7254For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7255will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7256just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7257
7258@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7259The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7260
7261@table @code
7262@item @samp{.vectors}
7263Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7264
7265@item @samp{.bootloader}
7266Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7267in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7268
7269@item @samp{.infomem}
7270Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7271this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7272
c0065db7 7273@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7274This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7275in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7276
7277@item @samp{.noinit}
7278Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7279
c0065db7 7280The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7281@end table
7282
7ef3addb
JL
7283@table @option
7284@cindex MSP430 Options
7285@kindex --code-region
7286@item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7287This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7288argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7289using this option.
7290
7291@kindex --data-region
7292@item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7293This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7294[either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7295for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7296
7297@kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7298@item --disable-sec-transformation
7299Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7300and @code{--data-region} options.
7301This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7302wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7303not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7304@end table
7305
36f63dca
NC
7306@ifclear GENERIC
7307@lowersections
7308@end ifclear
7309@end ifset
7310
35c08157
KLC
7311@ifset NDS32
7312@ifclear GENERIC
7313@raisesections
7314@end ifclear
7315
7316@node NDS32
7317@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7318@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7319For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7320relaxes objects according to these options.
7321
7322@table @code
7323@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7324Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7325
7326@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7327Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7328
7329@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7330Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7331
7332@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7333Export the EX9 table after linking.
7334
7335@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7336Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7337
7338@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7339Update the existing EX9 table.
7340
7341@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7342Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7343
7344@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7345Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7346
7347@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7348Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7349
7350@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7351Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7352@end table
7353
7354@ifclear GENERIC
7355@lowersections
7356@end ifclear
7357@end ifset
7358
78058a5e
SL
7359@ifset NIOSII
7360@ifclear GENERIC
7361@raisesections
7362@end ifclear
7363
7364@node Nios II
7365@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7366@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7367@kindex --relax on Nios II
7368
7369Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7370transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7371which may result in @command{ld} giving
7372@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7373The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7374trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7375outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7376trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7377be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7378larger than 256MB.
7379
7380The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7381is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7382@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7383locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7384source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7385register as a temporary.
7386
7387Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7388relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7389option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7390
7391@ifclear GENERIC
7392@lowersections
7393@end ifclear
7394@end ifset
7395
2a60a7a8
AM
7396@ifset POWERPC
7397@ifclear GENERIC
7398@raisesections
7399@end ifclear
7400
7401@node PowerPC ELF32
7402@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7403@cindex PowerPC long branches
7404@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7405Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7406displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7407@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7408@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7409the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7410section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7411section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7412@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7413both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7414considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7415
7416@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7417@table @option
7418@cindex PowerPC PLT
7419@kindex --bss-plt
7420@item --bss-plt
7421Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7422generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7423the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7424writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7425@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7426PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7427compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7428BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7429
016687f8
AM
7430@kindex --secure-plt
7431@item --secure-plt
7432@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7433@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7434when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7435layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7436style BSS PLT.
7437
2a60a7a8
AM
7438@cindex PowerPC GOT
7439@kindex --sdata-got
7440@item --sdata-got
7441The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7442sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7443@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7444section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7445@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7446@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7447@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7448@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7449PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7450pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7451GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7452really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7453
7454@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7455@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7456@item --emit-stub-syms
7457This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7458symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7459
7460@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7461@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7462@item --no-tls-optimize
7463PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7464sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7465disable the optimization.
7466@end table
7467
7468@ifclear GENERIC
7469@lowersections
7470@end ifclear
7471@end ifset
7472
7473@ifset POWERPC64
7474@ifclear GENERIC
7475@raisesections
7476@end ifclear
7477
7478@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7479@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7480
7481@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7482@table @option
7483@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7484@kindex --stub-group-size
7485@item --stub-group-size
7486Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7487by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7488@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7489sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7490a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7491the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7492conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7493prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7494A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7495branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7496@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7497@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7498detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7499positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7500
7501Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7502single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7503create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7504large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7505
7506@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7507@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7508@item --emit-stub-syms
7509This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7510symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7511
7512@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7513@kindex --dotsyms
7514@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7515@item --dotsyms
7516@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7517These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7518in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7519function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7520code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7521properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7522to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7523@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7524dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7525feature.
7526
7ae4ea7d
AM
7527@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7528@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7529@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7530@item --save-restore-funcs
7531@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7532These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7533provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7534@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7535function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7536link.
7537
2a60a7a8
AM
7538@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7539@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7540@item --no-tls-optimize
7541PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7542sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7543disable the optimization.
7544
7c9cf415
AM
7545@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7546@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7547@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7548@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7549@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7550These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7551stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7552an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7553@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7554stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7555option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7556Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7557slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7558application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7559normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7560
2a60a7a8
AM
7561@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7562@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7563@item --no-opd-optimize
7564PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7565corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7566the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7567Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7568
7569@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7570@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7571@item --non-overlapping-opd
7572Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7573@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7574the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7575entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7576
7577@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7578@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7579@item --no-toc-optimize
7580PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7581entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7582reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7583marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7584marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7585relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7586unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7587reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7588discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7589reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7590code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7591optimization.
7592
7593@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7594@kindex --no-multi-toc
7595@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7596If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7597@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7598where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7599entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7600total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7601grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7602TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7603calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7604help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
760564K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7606Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7607
7608@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7609@kindex --no-toc-sort
7610@item --no-toc-sort
7611By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7612happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7613placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7614with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7615referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7616@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7617results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7618off this feature.
7619
7620@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7621@kindex --plt-align
7622@kindex --no-plt-align
7623@item --plt-align
7624@itemx --no-plt-align
7625Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
2420fff6
AM
7626aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7627boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7628specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7629specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7630if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7631PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
794e51c0
AM
7632
7633@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7634@kindex --plt-static-chain
7635@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7636@item --plt-static-chain
7637@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7638Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7639chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7640chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7641
7642@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7643@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7644@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7645@item --plt-thread-safe
1be5d8d3 7646@itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
794e51c0
AM
7647With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7648lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7649another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7650order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7651memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7652barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7653looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7654seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7655default behaviour.
8b5f1ed8
AM
7656
7657@cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7658@kindex --plt-localentry
7659@kindex --no-plt-localentry
7660@item --plt-localentry
7661@itemx --no-localentry
7662ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7663ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7664(the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7665Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7666or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7667functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7668in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
d44c746a
AM
7669interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7670including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7671to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7672complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7673care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
2a60a7a8
AM
7674@end table
7675
7676@ifclear GENERIC
7677@lowersections
7678@end ifclear
7679@end ifset
7680
b4cbbe8f
AK
7681@ifset S/390
7682@ifclear GENERIC
7683@raisesections
7684@end ifclear
7685
7686@node S/390 ELF
7687@section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7688
7689@cindex S/390 ELF options
7690@table @option
7691
7692@cindex S/390
7693@kindex --s390-pgste
7694@item --s390-pgste
7695This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7696segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7697binaries marked that way.
7698@end table
7699
7700@ifclear GENERIC
7701@lowersections
7702@end ifclear
7703@end ifset
7704
49fa1e15
AM
7705@ifset SPU
7706@ifclear GENERIC
7707@raisesections
7708@end ifclear
7709
7710@node SPU ELF
7711@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7712
7713@cindex SPU ELF options
7714@table @option
7715
7716@cindex SPU plugins
7717@kindex --plugin
7718@item --plugin
7719This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7720
7721@cindex SPU overlays
7722@kindex --no-overlays
7723@item --no-overlays
7724Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7725regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7726@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7727turns off all this special overlay handling.
7728
7729@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7730@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7731@item --emit-stub-syms
7732This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7733symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7734
7735@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7736@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7737@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7738This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7739function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7740on calls to non-overlay regions.
7741
7742@cindex SPU local store size
7743@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7744@item --local-store=lo:hi
7745@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7746the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7747range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7748
c0065db7 7749@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7750@kindex --stack-analysis
7751@item --stack-analysis
7752SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7753unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7754under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7755@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7756@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7757determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7758for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7759for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7760for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7761find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7762and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7763under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7764dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7765is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7766and calls will be given.
7767
c0065db7 7768@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7769@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7770@item --emit-stack-syms
7771This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7772in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7773These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7774functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7775functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7776such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7777The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7778@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7779@end table
7780
7781@ifclear GENERIC
7782@lowersections
7783@end ifclear
7784@end ifset
7785
36f63dca
NC
7786@ifset TICOFF
7787@ifclear GENERIC
7788@raisesections
7789@end ifclear
7790
7791@node TI COFF
7792@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7793@cindex TI COFF versions
7794@kindex --format=@var{version}
7795The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7796TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7797also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7798format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7799header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7800
7801@ifclear GENERIC
7802@lowersections
7803@end ifclear
7804@end ifset
7805
2ca22b03
NC
7806@ifset WIN32
7807@ifclear GENERIC
7808@raisesections
7809@end ifclear
7810
7811@node WIN32
7812@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7813
c0065db7 7814This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
a05a5b64
TP
7815See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
7816command-line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7817
7818@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7819@cindex import libraries
7820@item import libraries
69da35b5 7821The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7822libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7823regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7824archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03 7825support for creating such libraries provided with the
a05a5b64 7826@samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
2ca22b03 7827
c0065db7
RM
7828@item exporting DLL symbols
7829@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7830The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7831
7832@table @emph
7833@item using auto-export functionality
7834@cindex using auto-export functionality
7835By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
a05a5b64 7836which is controlled by the following command-line options:
dc8465bf 7837
0a5d968e
NC
7838@itemize
7839@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7840@item --exclude-symbols
7841@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7842@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7843@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7844@end itemize
7845
09e2aba4
DK
7846When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7847(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7848symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7849often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7850private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7851options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7852exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7853final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7854
7855If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7856command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7857if either of the following are true:
7858
7859@itemize
7860@item A DEF file is used.
7861@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7862@end itemize
dc8465bf 7863
c0065db7
RM
7864@item using a DEF file
7865@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7866Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7867an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7868exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7869name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7870command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7871
7872@example
7873gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7874@end example
7875
0a5d968e
NC
7876Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7877@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7878
dc8465bf
NC
7879Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7880
7881@example
4b5bd4e7 7882LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7883
7884EXPORTS
7885foo
7886bar
7887_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7888another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7889var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7890doo = foo == foo2
7891eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7892@end example
dc8465bf 7893
7fcab871 7894This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7895symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7896alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7897by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7898@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7899@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7900export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7901in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7902symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7903
6b31ad16
DS
7904The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7905name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7906the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7907
b45619c0
NC
7908When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7909library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7910@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7911executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7912
7913With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7914specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7915non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7916
7917If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7918or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7919filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7920
4b5bd4e7
DS
7921The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7922
7923@example
7924EXPORTS
7925 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7926 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7927 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7928@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7929
7930Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7931@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7932@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7933@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7934Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7935@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7936string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7937
7938The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7939
7940@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7941will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7942by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7943linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7944library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7945
7946@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7947The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7948the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7949@code{*_imp__foo}).
7950
7951@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7952well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7953read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7954variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7955the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7956extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7957application will behave unexpectedly.
7958
7959@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7960it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7961symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
de194d85 7962API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
4b5bd4e7 7963the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7964
4b5bd4e7
DS
7965See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7966other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7967
7968@cindex creating a DEF file
7969While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
a05a5b64 7970with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7971
7972@item Using decorations
7973@cindex Using decorations
7974Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7975itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7976declared as:
7977
7978@example
7979__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7980__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7981@end example
7982
7983All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7984any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7985this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7986the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7987
7988Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7989decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7990instead:
7991
7992@example
7993__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7994__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7995@end example
7996
c0065db7
RM
7997This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7998when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7999variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
8000code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 8001of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
8002omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
8003@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 8004information.
c0065db7 8005@end table
dc8465bf 8006
2ca22b03
NC
8007@cindex automatic data imports
8008@item automatic data imports
8009The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 8010by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 8011compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 8012issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 8013code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 8014c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 8015initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 8016decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 8017platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
8018command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8019The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8020suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8021trigger the feature's use.
8022
c0065db7 8023auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
8024additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8025
c0065db7 8026"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
8027documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8028
c0065db7
RM
8029The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8030occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8031One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
8032below.
8033
8034@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
8035For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8036object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8037offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8038field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8039in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 8040without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 8041The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
8042references.
8043
c0065db7
RM
8044The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8045be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8046themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8047runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8048compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8049support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
8050run without error on an older system.
8051
c0065db7
RM
8052@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8053enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
8054
8055@cindex direct linking to a dll
8056@item direct linking to a dll
8057The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8058including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 8059libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 8060traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
8061libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8062function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8063though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 8064storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 8065tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
8066large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8067
c0065db7 8068Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 8069@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 8070of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
8071perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8072select the dll instead of an import library.
8073
2ca22b03 8074
69da35b5
NC
8075For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8076to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
8077
8078@example
45e948fe
NC
8079libxxx.dll.a
8080xxx.dll.a
8081libxxx.a
8082xxx.lib
f6c4d4b1 8083libxxx.lib
69da35b5 8084cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
8085libxxx.dll
8086xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
8087@end example
8088
69da35b5
NC
8089before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8090
c0065db7
RM
8091(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8092where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8093@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8094file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
8095@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8096
c0065db7
RM
8097Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8098@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
8099was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8100various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8101could coexist on the same machine.
8102
2ca22b03
NC
8103The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8104applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 8105libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
8106
8107@example
8108bin/
8109 cygxxx.dll
8110lib/
8111 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 8112 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
8113@end example
8114
c0065db7
RM
8115Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8116done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
8117
81181. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8119@example
8120gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8121@end example
2ca22b03 8122
69da35b5
NC
8123However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8124(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8125@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8126not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8127
2ca22b03
NC
81282. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8129directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8130should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8131making the app/dll.
8132
8133@example
8134ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 8135@end example
2ca22b03
NC
8136
8137Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8138
8139@example
8140gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8141@end example
69da35b5
NC
8142
8143This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8144perfectly legal
8145
8146@example
8147bin/
8148 cygxxx-5.dll
8149lib/
c0065db7 8150 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8151@end example
8152
dc8465bf 8153Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8154even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8155@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8156
8157Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8158wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8159
81601. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8161work with auto-imported data.
8162
dc8465bf
NC
81632. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8164import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8165symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8166for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8167possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8168
45e948fe
NC
81693. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8170critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8171in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8172stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8173
69da35b5 8174So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8175true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8176a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8177binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8178massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8179requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8180will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8181
c0065db7 8182@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8183@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8184@item adding additional names
8185Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8186A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8187exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8188when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8189import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8190
c0065db7 8191@example
dc8465bf
NC
8192LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8193
8194EXPORTS
c0065db7 8195foo
dc8465bf 8196_foo = foo
c0065db7 8197@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8198
8199The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8200
8201Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8202source code using the "weak" attribute:
8203
c0065db7
RM
8204@example
8205void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8206void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8207@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8208
8209See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8210symbols.
8211
8212@item renaming symbols
8213Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8214kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8215@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8216DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8217created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8218
c0065db7 8219@example
dc8465bf
NC
8220LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8221
8222EXPORTS
8223_foo = foo
c0065db7 8224@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8225
8226The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8227@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8228@end table
dc8465bf 8229
0a5d968e 8230Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
a05a5b64 8231unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
0a5d968e 8232If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8233@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8234that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8235@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8236renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8237to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8238the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8239In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8240which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8241
8242@cindex weak externals
8243@item weak externals
8244The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8245weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8246defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8247are three variants of weak externals:
8248@itemize
8249@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8250called lazy externals.
8251@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8252This form is not presently implemented.
8253@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8254implemented.
8255@end itemize
8256As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8257are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8258uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8259
8260@cindex aligned common symbols
8261@item aligned common symbols
8262As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8263desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8264the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8265carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8266by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8267tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8268but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8269warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8270
2ca22b03
NC
8271@end table
8272
8273@ifclear GENERIC
8274@lowersections
8275@end ifclear
8276@end ifset
8277
e0001a05
NC
8278@ifset XTENSA
8279@ifclear GENERIC
8280@raisesections
8281@end ifclear
8282
8283@node Xtensa
8284@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8285
8286@cindex Xtensa processors
8287The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8288@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8289specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8290keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8291example, with the command:
8292
8293@smallexample
8294SECTIONS
8295@{
8296 .text : @{
8297 *(.literal .text)
8298 @}
8299@}
8300@end smallexample
8301
8302@noindent
8303@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8304and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8305literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8306interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8307group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8308files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8309and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8310
43cd72b9 8311@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8312@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8313Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8314provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8315is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8316literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8317will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8318location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8319the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8320unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8321@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8322range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8323
8324For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8325to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8326instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8327instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8328instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8329@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8330hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8331By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8332switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8333density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8334instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8335performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8336linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8337a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8338
8339The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8340control the linker:
8341
8342@cindex Xtensa options
8343@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8344@item --size-opt
8345When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8346more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8347no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8348alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8349preserve the correctness of the code.
8350@end table
e0001a05
NC
8351
8352@ifclear GENERIC
8353@lowersections
8354@end ifclear
8355@end ifset
8356
252b5132
RH
8357@ifclear SingleFormat
8358@node BFD
8359@chapter BFD
8360
8361@cindex back end
8362@cindex object file management
8363@cindex object formats available
8364@kindex objdump -i
8365The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8366These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8367object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8368format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8369it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8370associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8371object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8372(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8373list all the formats available for your configuration.
8374
8375@cindex BFD requirements
8376@cindex requirements for BFD
8377As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8378several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8379BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8380formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8381been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8382BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8383may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8384
8385One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8386mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8387useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8388conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8389
8390@menu
8391* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8392@end menu
8393
8394@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8395@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8396@cindex opening object files
8397@include bfdsumm.texi
8398@end ifclear
8399
8400@node Reporting Bugs
8401@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8402@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8403@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8404
ff5dcc92 8405Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8406
8407Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8408it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8409to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8410work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8411@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8412
8413In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8414information that enables us to fix the bug.
8415
8416@menu
8417* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8418* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8419@end menu
8420
8421@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8422@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8423@cindex bug criteria
8424
8425If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8426
8427@itemize @bullet
8428@cindex fatal signal
8429@cindex linker crash
8430@cindex crash of linker
8431@item
8432If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8433@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8434
8435@cindex error on valid input
8436@item
ff5dcc92 8437If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8438
8439@cindex invalid input
8440@item
ff5dcc92 8441If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8442may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8443object files are correct.
8444
8445@item
8446If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8447improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8448@end itemize
8449
8450@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8451@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8452@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8453@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8454
8455A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8456products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8457recommend you contact that organization first.
8458
8459You can find contact information for many support companies and
8460individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8461distribution.
8462
ad22bfe8 8463@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8464Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8465@value{BUGURL}.
8466@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8467
8468The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8469@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8470fact or leave it out, state it!
8471
8472Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8473problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8474assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8475matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8476the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8477location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8478were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8479into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8480specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8481and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8482
8483Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8484the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8485on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8486
8487Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8488bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8489respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8490You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8491
8492To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8493
8494@itemize @bullet
8495@item
ff5dcc92 8496The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8497the @samp{--version} argument.
8498
8499Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8500the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8501
8502@item
ff5dcc92 8503Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8504patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8505
8506@item
8507The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8508version number.
8509
8510@item
ff5dcc92 8511What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8512``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8513
8514@item
8515The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8516observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8517list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8518sufficient.
8519
8520If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8521and then we might not encounter the bug.
8522
8523@item
8524A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8525bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8526provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8527bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8528state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8529requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8530we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8531attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8532
8533If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8534@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8535object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8536@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8537how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8538
8539@item
8540A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8541incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8542
ff5dcc92 8543Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8544will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8545not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8546a chance to make a mistake.
8547
8548Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8549say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8550copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8551C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8552and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8553fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8554you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8555any conclusion from our observations.
8556
8557@item
ff5dcc92 8558If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8559diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8560@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8561If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8562context, not by line number.
8563
8564The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8565sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8566@end itemize
8567
8568Here are some things that are not necessary:
8569
8570@itemize @bullet
8571@item
8572A description of the envelope of the bug.
8573
8574Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8575which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8576changes will not affect it.
8577
8578This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8579will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8580with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8581We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8582
8583Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8584of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8585output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8586less time, and so on.
8587
8588However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8589report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8590
8591@item
8592A patch for the bug.
8593
8594A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8595the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8596a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8597to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8598
ff5dcc92 8599Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8600construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8601through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8602able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8603fixed.
8604
8605And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8606patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8607help us to understand.
8608
8609@item
8610A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8611
8612Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8613things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8614@end itemize
8615
8616@node MRI
8617@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8618@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8619To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8620linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8621alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8622described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8623simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8624@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8625linker commands; these commands are described here.
8626
8627In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8628file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8629features to make use of them.
8630
8631You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8632@samp{-c} command-line option.
8633
8634Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8635command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8636blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8637MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8638issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8639
8640Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8641
8642You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8643lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8644The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8645
8646@table @code
8647@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8648@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8649@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8650Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8651the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8652@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8653your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8654script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8655commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8656input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8657@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8658
8659@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8660@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8661Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8662in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8663
8664@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8665
8666@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8667@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8668Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8669@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8670
8671@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8672@item BASE @var{expression}
8673Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8674absolute addresses) in the output file.
8675
8676@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8677@item CHIP @var{expression}
8678@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8679This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8680
8681@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8682@item END
8683This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8684
8685@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8686@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8687Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
dc12032b 8688language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
252b5132
RH
8689
8690@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8691@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8692Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8693@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8694
8695The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8696same line, with no change in its effect.
8697
8698@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8699@item LOAD @var{filename}
8700@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8701Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8702same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8703command line.
8704
8705@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8706@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8707@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8708MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8709option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8710
8711@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8712@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8713@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8714Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8715order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8716script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8717sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8718file, in the order specified.
8719
8720@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8721@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8722@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8723@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8724Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8725@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8726
8727@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8728@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8729@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8730@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8731You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8732specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8733If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8734@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8735@end table
8736
793c5807
NC
8737@node GNU Free Documentation License
8738@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8739@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8740
370b66a1
CD
8741@node LD Index
8742@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8743
8744@printindex cp
8745
8746@tex
7ca01ed9 8747% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8748% meantime:
8749\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8750\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8751\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8752\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8753\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8754\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8755\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8756\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8757\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8758% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8759@end tex
8760
252b5132 8761@bye
This page took 1.572485 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.